Nokia 7260 User Manual
UserâÂÂs Guide N okia 7260 9231769 Issue 1
DECLARATI ON OF CONFORMITY We, NO KIA CORPO RATI ON d ecl are u nder ou r so le r esp onsi bi lity that th e produ ct R M-17 i s i n con for mit y with the p rov ision s of the follo wing Co uncil Dir ecti ve: 1999/ 5/EC. A c opy of the D e cla ratio n o f Co nfo rmit y ca n be fo un d fr om ht tp:/ /w ww. nok ia. com /ph on es/ decl ara tio n_ of_co n for mit y/. Copy r ig ht é 20 04 N oki a . Al l ri gh ts res e rv ed . Reprodu cti on , tr ansf er, dis tr ibuti on or s tora ge of part or a ll o f th e co nten ts i n thi s d ocume nt in any for m without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Xpress-on and Pop-Por t are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Cor porat ion . O ther prod uc t and comp any n ame s men tio ned he rei n ma y be tr ade mar ks o r tra denam es of th eir resp ectiv e own ers. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 58184 37 and oth er pend ing pa tents . T9 text inpu t soft ware Copyr ight (C) 1997 -2004. Tegi c Comm unications, Inc. All rights reserved. Inclu des RS A BS AFE c rypto graph ic or securi ty pro tocol so ftw are from RSA S ecuri ty. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Noki a oper ate s a po li cy of cont in uous deve lopm ent . N okia r ese rve s t he rig ht t o ma ke ch ange s and improvements to any of the pro ducts described in this doc ument without prior notice.
Un der n o circ umsta nce s sh all N okia be re sponsi ble fo r an y los s of d ata or inco me or any speci al, inci den tal, con sequ enti al or in di rect dam ages h owsoe ver ca used. T h e c o n t e n t s o f t h i s d o c u m e n t a r e p r o v i d e d " a s i s " . E x c e p t a s r e q u i r e d b y a p p l i ca b l e l a w , n o w a r r a n t i e s o f an y kin d, e ithe r exp ress or i mpli ed, inclu ding , bu t no t limi ted to, t he im plie d w arran tie s of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose , are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice. The av ail abili ty of part icu lar pr od ucts m ay va ry by re gion . Pl ease che ck wi th th e No kia deale r nea re st t o you. Ex port Co ntro ls This devi ce may c on tain commod iti es, t ech nol ogy or soft wa re sub ject to export laws and regul at ions fro m the U S and ot her coun tries . Dive rsion c ont rary t o law i s prohib ite d. 9231 76 9 / I s sue 1
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4 Contents FFOR YOUR SAFETY............................................................................ ................. 10 General information ............... .............................. ............................................... 12 About your d evice .............................. ................................. ................ ............................... . ...................... 12 Overvie w of the functions of the phone ....................... ................................ ................................ .. .... 12 Shared memo ry ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. .............. ....... 14 Nokia PC Suite software ................... ................................. ................ ................................ .... .................. 14 Acce ss codes ........................ ................................ ................. ................................ .......... ...................... ...... 15 Securit y code (5 to 10 digits) ....................................... ................................ .......................... ............ 15 PIN and PIN 2 codes (4 to 8 digits), Mod ule PIN and Sign ing PIN ..................................... ...... 15 PUK and PU K2 codes (8 digits).... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ......... 16 Barring passwo rd (4 digits) .......................... ................. ................................ ......................... ....... ...... 16 Wallet cod e (4 to 10 digits) ......................... ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ...... 16 Netwo rk service s. ................................ ................................. ................ ............................. ... ...................... 17 Configur ation settings service .... ................................. ................ ................................ ............ .......... 17 Dow nloading conte nt and applic ations ....... ................. ................................ ................................ ... ... 18 Nokia sup port on the Web ............... ................................. ................ ................................ ....... ......... ...... 19 1. Getting started ................................................. ............................................... 20 Instal ling the S IM ca rd and t he batte ry........................................ ................ ................................ ...... 20 Chargi ng the b attery ......................... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 22 Switc hing th e phone on and off .... ................................. ................................ ................ ............ .......... 23 Norm al operating posit ion ............................... ................. ................................ ...................... ................ 24 Putt ing on a wrist strap.................... ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. ...... 25
Con tents 5 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 2. Your phone.......................... ............................................................ ................. 26 Keys and connectors .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... ...... 26 Stand by mode ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .... ...................... 28 Wallpape r .......... ................................ ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ...................... 29 Screen s aver ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ...... 29 Power s aving .... ................ ................................ ................................. .............................. .................. ...... 30 Essential in dicators ......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ..................... 30 Keyp ad lock (Keyguard) .................... ................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ...... 32 3. Call funct ions ..................... ............................................................ ................. 34 Making a ca ll ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ .......... ...... ...................... 34 Speed dialling a phone num ber .. ................................. ................................ ................ ............... . ...... 35 Answe ring or rejecting an incom ing call ...................... ................................ ................ .................. .... 35 Call w aiting....... ................ ................................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ...... 36 Opti ons during a call ......................... ................................. ................ ................................ ...................... 36 4. Writing text ........................ ............................................................ ................. 38 Setting pre dictive text input on or off .......................... ................ ................................ .............. .. ...... 38 Using predicti ve text i nput .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ...... 38 Writing c ompoun d words ............................. ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ...... 39 Using tradition al text input ............. ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................. 39 Tips for wri ting text ........................... ................ ................................. .............................. .. ................ ...... 40 5. Using th e menu .................. ............................................................ ................. 42 Acce ssing a m enu func tion ............. ................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ ...... 42 List of menu func tions ...... ................................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. ...... 43
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6 6. Menu functions ................................................ ............................................... 48 Me ssages ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ...................... 48 Text messages (S MS) ...................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................. 48 Flash me ssages ................................................ ................................. ................ ................ ............... ....... 53 Multim edia messages (MMS) ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ............... . ...... 54 Instant message s (Chat) ................................ ................................. ................ ....................... ......... ...... 60 E-mail applicati on .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. .................... 70 Voice m essages ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................ ...... 74 Info message s... ................................ ................................. ................ .............................. .. ...................... 75 Service comm ands .......... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ...... 75 Deleting all messages from a folder ........................... ................................ ................ ................. ..... 75 Message settings ............. ................................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 76 Message counter ............. ................ ................................. ................................ .................. .................... 81 Call regi ster .......... ................................ ................ ................................. ....................... ......... ................ ...... 81 Recent calls lists .............................. ................................. ................ .............................. .. ...................... 81 Counters and timers for calls, data and mess ages . ................................ ................................ ...... 82 Cont acts ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ................ ...... 83 Selecting set tings for contac ts ... ................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... ...... 84 Saving name s and phone numb ers (Add contact) .................. ................................ ................ ...... 84 Saving multiple numbe rs or te xt items per name .................. ................ ................................ ...... 85 Adding an image to a name or number in contact s .............................. ................................ ...... 86 Searc hing for a contact ................. ................................. ................ ................................ ...... .......... ...... 87 Deleting contacts ............ ................................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 87 Editing o r dele ting d etails ............ ................................. ................................ ....................... ............... 88 My presence ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............. ................... ...... 89 Subscri bed names ........... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............. ...... 91 Copying c ontacts ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 94 Sendin g and receiving a busine ss card ..... ................................. ................................ .................... .. 94
Con tents 7 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Speed dials ........................ ................ ................................. ................................ ........... ..... ...................... 95 Voice d ialling .... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ...... 96 Info numbe rs and service numbers ............ ................. ................................ ................................ .. .... 97 My numbers ...... ................ ................................ ................................. .............................. .................. ...... 98 Caller gro ups .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ................... ...... 98 Settin gs ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........... ................ ...... 99 Profiles ............... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ...... 99 Themes ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... ................... 100 Tone settin gs .... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................. ... ................... 100 Persona l shortcuts .......... ................ ................................. ................................ .................. ................. 101 Display setting s................ ................................ ................................. ................ .............. ................. .... 102 Time and date setting s .. ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ... 104 Call s ettings ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... ... 105 Phone settings ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ... 107 Connecti vity...... ................................ ................ ................................. ............................ .... ................ ... 109 Enhanc ement settings ... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ............ 112 Configur ation settings ................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... .............. 113 Security settings .............................. ................ ................................. ............................... ................. ... 115 Restore fa ctory s ettings ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ... 116 Operato r menu .................... ................................ ................. ................................ ............. ... ................... 116 Galle ry.................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................... ............................. ... 117 Me dia ..... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ................ ... 119 Camera ............... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ ... 119 Radio ... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 122 Voice re corder .................. ................................ ................. ................................ .............. ..................... 125 Orga niser ............... ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......................... ... 126 Alarm cl ock ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................ .................... ... 126 Calendar ............................. ................................ ................. ................................ ......... ....................... ... 127
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8 To-do list ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ......................... ....................... ... 130 Notes... ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ... 131 Synch ronisation ............................... ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 131 Appl ications ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ... 133 Game s and a pplications ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ........ ........... 133 Calculato r .......... ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................... 136 Countdow n tim er ............................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... ................ 138 Stopwa tch ......................... ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ... 138 Wallet . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 140 Service s.. ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................... 144 Basic steps for accessi ng and using services ........... ................ ................................ ................... 145 Settin g up the phone for a service .............................. ................................ ............................... . ... 145 Making a connec tion to a service .............. ................................. ................ ................................ ... 146 Browsi ng the pages of a service . ................................. ................................ ................ .............. ..... 147 Disconne ct from a service ............................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ... 148 Appea rance settings of the brow ser .......... ................................. ................................ .................. . 149 Cookies ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 149 Bookmark s ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................ .... ................... 150 Downlo ading .................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ... 151 Service inbox .... ................................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ................... 151 The cac he memory .......................... ................................. ................................ ................ .... ............... 153 Browse r security .............................. ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 153 SIM s ervices ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................... 156 7. PC Connectivity ................................................ ............................................ 158 PC S uite . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ................... 158 (E)GPRS, HSCSD and C SD ............. ................................. ................................ ................ ........... ........ 160 Using data communic ation a pplications ...................... ................ ................................ ................... 1 60
Con tents 9 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 8. Battery information............ ............................................................ .............. 161 Chargi ng and Disch arging................ ................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... ... 161 CARE AND MAINTENANCE.... ............................................................ .............. 163 ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION ................................................ .............. 165
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 FOR Y OUR SAF E TY Read thes e simple guid elin es. Not fo llowing th em may be dang erous or il legal . Read th e complete use r guide for further informat ion. SWI TCH ON S AF ELY Do no t sw itch th e phon e on w hen w ireles s phon e use i s prohi bited o r whe n it may cause inte rfer ence or da nger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all lo cal law s. Alwa ys keep your hands fr ee to opera te the vehicl e whil e driving . Your fi rst consi deration while dri ving shou ld be road sa fety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HOS PITALS Follow any res trictio ns. Swit ch the phone o ff near medica l equ ipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restri ctions. Wirel ess device s can cause inter ference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e phone a t a refu ell ing poin t. Don't use near fuel or chemica ls. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Follow a ny restri ctions. Do n't use the p hone whe re blas ting is in p rogres s.
FOR YOU R SAFETY 11 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. USE SEN SIB LY Use only in the normal posi tion a s expla ined i n the p rodu ct docum enta tion. D on't touch t he anten na unnece ssarily. QU ALIFIED S ERVICE Only quali fied per sonnel may ins tall or rep air this product. ENH ANC EME NTS AN D B ATT ERI E S Use only ap proved enhancemen ts an d batterie s. D o not connect in comp atible produ cts . WATER-RESISTA NCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up co pies or keep a wri tten recor d of all imp ortant informatio n stored in your pho ne. CONNECTING T O OT HER DEVICES When connecting to an y other device, read its user guide for d etailed safety instruct ions. Do not co nnect in compatible p roducts . EMER GEN CY CA LLS Ensure the phone is swit ched on and in service. Pres s as many ti mes as needed to cle ar the displa y and return to the st art screen. Key in the emergen cy number, then press . Give your lo cation . Do not end the ca ll until g iven perm is sion to do so .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 12 Gene ral information â Abou t you r devi ce The wi reless device des cribed in this gu ide is approved for use on the EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 net work. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and r espect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any f eatures in t his device, other than the alarm c lock, the devi ce must be swit ched on. Do not switch the devic e on when wireless device use may cause int erference or danger . Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts . Keep them out of the r each of small children. For availabilit y of approv ed enhancements, please check wit h your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. â Overv i ew of the fu nc tio ns of the ph one The Nokia 7260 phone provide s many functions that are pract ical for daily use, such a s a calenda r, a clock, an alarm c lock, and a built-in camera . The camera can be used for recording vide o clips and taking pictures that you can, for example, attach as wallpaper in standby mode or as thumbnail pictures in Contac ts . See
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 13 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Camera on page 11 9 . Personalis e your phone wit h themes. See Themes on page 100 . Your phone supports ⢠EDGE (Enh anced D ata rates for GSM Ev oluti on), s ee (E)G PRS on page 11 0 . ED G E is a radio interface modulation t echnique which increases GRPS dat a rates. ⢠A multimedia messaging service (MMS) and is able t o send and receive multimedia messages composed of text , a picture, a sound clip and a video clip. You can s ave the pict ures, ringing t ones or themes for per sonalising your phone. See Multimedia mes sages (MMS) on page 54 . ⢠xHTML br owser that ena bles you to ret rieve more colourful and richer graphical cont ent from web servers and t o view i t. See Services on page 144 . ⢠An e-mail application t o receive, read and send e -mails. See E-mail application on page 70 . ⢠Presence-enhanced contacts that enable s you to conv eniently share your availability information with y our colleagues, f amily and friends . See My presence on page 89 . ⢠Insta nt messages, which is a way of sending s hort text message s that are delivered ins tantly to online users. See I ns ta nt me ssag es (Ch at) on page 60 . ⢠Polyphonic s ound (MIDI) that consis ts of several sound compone nts played at the same time. The phone has sound components from over 128 i nstruments, but it c an play up to 16 instruments at t he same time. Polyphonic sounds are used in ringing tones and mes sage alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 14 ⢠Java 2 Micro Edition, J2ME TM , and inc ludes some Java applic ations and games that hav e been spec ially designed for mo bile phones. You can download new applications and games to your phone, see Applications on page 133 . Shar ed me mor y The phone has thr ee different memories. The following fe atures in this device may share t he first memo ry: contact s, text mess ages, instant mes sages and SMS e- mails, voice tags, calendar and notes. The second shared memory is used by multimedia messages, files stored in Gal lery and config uration settings. The t hird shared memor y is used by e- mail application, Java games and applications. U se of one or more of these features may r educe the memory availa ble for the remaining features sharing the same memory. F or example, sa ving many Ga llery items may use a ll of the av ailable memory in t he second memor y. Your device may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this cas e, delete so me of the info rmation or entrie s stored in the c orresponding shared memor y before cont inuing. â Nokia PC Suite soft ware With t he Nokia PC Suite software you can, for example, manage t he photos captured with the phoneâÂÂs camer a and handle ringing tones and wallpa pers. Nokia PC Suite is available on N okiaâÂÂs Web s ite at www .nokia.com.
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 15 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Acc ess c odes Security code (5 to 1 0 digits) The s ecurity code helps to protect your phone against unauthor ised use. The pre- set code is 12345. Change the code, and ke ep the new code secret an d in a safe place s eparate from your phone. To change the code, and to s et the phone t o request the code, s ee Se cur ity s etti ngs on page 11 5 . If y ou key in an incorrect securi ty code five times in succes sion, the p hone ignores further entries of the c ode. Wait f or 5 minutes and k ey in the code again. PIN and PIN2 co des (4 to 8 dig it s), Mod ule PIN and Sig ning PIN ⢠The PIN (Personal Identific ation Number) code helps to protect your SIM card against unaut horised use. The PIN code is usuall y supplied with t he SIM car d. Set the phone to request the PIN code ea ch t ime the phone is switched on, see Security settings on page 11 5 . ⢠The PIN 2 code may be supplied wit h the SIM car d and is required to access some funct ions, such as call counter s. ⢠The module PIN is required to access the information in t he security module. See Sec urity module on page 153 . The module PIN is supplied with t he SIM card if the SIM card has a security module i n it. ⢠The s igning PIN is require d for the digit al signature. See Digital s ignature on page 155 . The signing PIN is supplied with t he SIM card if the SIM card has a security module in it.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 16 If y ou key in an incor rect PIN code th ree times in succession, t he phone may display PIN blocked or PIN code blocked , fo r example, a nd ask y ou to enter the PUK code. PUK a nd PU K2 co de s ( 8 digi ts) The PUK (Per sonal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is r equired to change a bloc ked PIN2 code . If the codes are not supplied with t he SIM card, contact your local service provider for the codes . Barr ing pa ssw ord (4 d igi ts ) The barr ing password is required when using t he Call barring service , see Security settings on page 11 5 . You can obtain the pas sword from your service provide r. Wallet code ( 4 to 10 digit s) The wallet code is required to access the wallet services. If you key in an incorrect wallet code three times in succession, the wallet application is blocked f or 5 minutes. T he next thr ee incorrec t entries of t he code will double the time. For further inf orma tion, se e W allet on page 140 .
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 17 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Networ k servic es To us e the phone you mus t have service from a w ireless serv ice provider. Many of the featur es in this device de pend on features in the wireless network to function. These Network Services may not be a vailable on all networks or y ou may have to make s pecific ar rangements with y our service provider before you can utilize Network Ser vices. Your service provi der may need to give you additional instructions for their use and e xplain what ch arges will apply. Some networks may have limit ations that aff ect how you can use Networ k Services . For instance, s ome networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activat ed in your devic e. If so, t hey will not appe ar on your de vice menu. Cont act your service provider for more inf ormation. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols . Some features of this device , such as multimedia me ssages, e-mail applicat ion, instant messages, presence s ervice, Java game s and applicat ions and Internet se rvices requir e network suppor t for these t echnologies. Configur atio n settings ser vice To us e some of the net work servic es, such as mobile Internet services, MMS, Instant messages, E-Mail application, or Synchronisation, your phone needs the correc t configuration settings. You may rec eive the settings directly as a configuration mes sage and you need to sav e the settings on y our phone. T he service provider may provide a PIN that is nee ded to save the sett ings. For more information on t he availability of the settings, contact your network operator,
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 18 service provider, ne arest authorised Nokia dealer or visit the s upport area on t he Nokia website, www.nokia.com. . When you have receiv ed a conf iguration message Configuration sett. received is displaye d. To view the receiv ed settings, pr ess Show . ⢠To save the received setti ngs, press Save . If the phone asks Enter se ttings' PIN: , key in the PIN code for the set tings and press OK . Set these settings as the default or not. For ava ilability of t he PIN code , contact the s ervice pr ovider that supplies the settings. ⢠To dis card the r eceived set tings, press Di sca rd . To vie w and edit the settings see Configuration settings on page 11 3 . â Dow nlo ading co nt ent a nd appli cati ons You may b e able to download new content (for example images and video c lips) and applica tions into the phone (network servic e). 1. Select the download f unction for exa mple in the Collection and Gall ery menus. To ac cess the dow nload function, see t he respect ive menu des criptions. A list of bookma rks is s hown. Select More bookmarks i f y o u w a n t t o v i e w t h e bookmar ks available in t he Serv ices menu. 2. Select the bookmark of the brows er page that y ou want t o access. If t he connection f ails, change the active set of connection settings in t he Services menu and tr y the co nnection again. Follow the instruct ions provided by the servi ce.
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 19 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. Your device may have s ome bookmark s loade d for site s not a ffilia ted with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endors e these sit es. If you ch oose to acces s them, you should take the sa me precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site. â Nok ia suppo rt on th e Web Check <www .nokia.com/suppor t> or your local Nokia We b site for t he latest version of this guide, addit ional information, downloads , and services related to your Nokia product.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 20 1. Gett ing starte d â Ins talling the SIM card a nd the ba tte ry Keep all SIM card s out of the re ach of small child ren. For ava ilab ility and info rmat ion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vend or. This may be the servi ce provider, netw ork op erat or, or other v endor . Before removing the co ver, always swi tch off the power and disconnect the charger and an y ot he r de v ic e. A l wa ys s tor e and u se th e dev ice wi th th e cov e rs a tt ac he d. 1. To remove the back cover of the phone: Push the bac k cover r elease button (1) and gently prise the back cover away from the phone beginning a t the bottom of t he phone (2). 2. Remove the bat tery by lif ting it as shown. Insert the SIM card into t he SIM card holder until it sn aps into position. Mak e su re th at the SIM c ard is properly inserted and that the golden cont act area on the card is facing downwards.
Gett ing st arte d 21 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To remove the SIM card pres s the car d release (1) and slide the SIM card towards the t op of the phone (2). 3. Rep lace th e ba tter y. O bserv e the con tac ts of the battery 4. Align the top of the back cover with the top of the phone (1), press the bottom of the b ack cover t o lock it (2).
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 22 â Ch arging th e bat tery Warn ing : Use o nly batteri es , charge rs, and enhanc ements ap proved by Nokia f or use with this particula r model. The use of any other types may inval idate any appro val or wa rranty, a nd may b e dange rous. Check the model number of a ny charger before use wit h this device. Th is device is intended for us e whe n supp lied wi th po wer from A C-1, A CP-7 , ACP-8, A CP-1 2, LCH-9 or LCH- 12 chargers. 1. Connect the lead from the charger to t he socket on the bottom of your phone. 2. Connect the charger to an AC wall s ocket. The t ext Charging is displayed briefly if t he phone is switche d on. If the battery is completely empt y, it ma y take a f ew minutes befor e the charging indicat or appears on t he display or be fore any c alls can be made. You can use t he phone while the charger is connecte d. The c harging time depends on the char ger and the ba ttery used. F or example , charging a ba ttery w ith the AC-1 or ACP-12 charger take s approximately 1 hour and 20 minut es while the phone is in sta ndby mode.
Gett ing st arte d 23 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Swi tc hi ng th e pho ne on an d o ff Warn ing : Do not sw itch the p hone on whe n wire less p hone use is p rohibi ted o r when it may ca use interferenc e or da nger. Press and hold the power key as shown. Note that if the phone displays Insert SIM c ard even though the SIM card is properly ins erted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network ope rator or service provider. Your phone does not s upport 5-Volt SIM cards and the c ard may need to be changed. ⢠If th e phone as ks for a PIN code, key in the PIN code (for example, displayed as * ***), and press OK . See also PIN code request in Security settings on page 11 5 and Access codes on page 15 . ⢠If t he phone as ks for a s ecurity code, key in the s ecurity c ode (for example , display ed as ** ***), and press OK . See als o Access codes on page 15 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 24 â Normal operati ng position Your phone h as an intern al ante nna. Us e the phone only i n its norma l oper ating posi tion a s show n. Note: As wi th an y other radio t ransm itting devi ce, do not touc h the anten na unnece ssarily whe n the d evice is switched on. Conta ct with the antenna affects call quali ty and ma y cau se th e dev ic e to op era t e at a hi gh er p ow er level th an otherwis e need ed. Avo iding co ntact with the ant enna a rea wh en op eratin g the devic e opti mise s the antenna performance a nd the battery life.
Gett ing st arte d 25 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Put ting on a wrist s trap There a two eyele ts to at tach the wris t strap: ⢠At t he lower left side near the ke y . ⢠At t he upper right edge . Thread t he strap as shown i n the pict ure and tighten it.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 26 2. Y our phone â Key s an d co nn e cto rs 1. Power key Switches the phone on and off. When the keypad is locked, pressing the power key briefly t urns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on for approximately 15 seconds. 2. Earpiece 3. Loudspeaker 4. Volume keys 5. Selection keys and , middle selection key The funct ion of thes e keys depends on the guiding text shown on the display above the keys. See Standby mode on page 28 . 6. 5-way joyst ick Enables scrolling through names, phon e numbers, menus or settings. The 5- way joy stick is also used to move the cursor up and down, and left and right when writ ing text, us ing the calendar , and in some game applications. Moving
You r phone 27 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. the joystick als o functions as t he middle se lection key, and pressing it briefly selec ts the function s hown on the di splay above the joystic k. In standby mode, the joy stick functions as a shortc ut. Move the joy stick ⢠right to acce ss the cale nda r. ⢠left t o start writ ing an SMS message. ⢠up t o ac tiv ate the cam era. ⢠down t o access th e list of cont acts. 7. dial s a phone number, and answers a call. In s tandby mode, it shows the list of the most recently called numbers. 8. ends an active call. Exits from any f unction. 9. - enter numbers and characters. and are us ed for various purposes in di fferent functions. 10. Charger c onnector 11. Pop -Port TM connector used, f or example, f or headsets and t he data cable.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 28 12. Infrared (IR) port 13. Came ra lens â Sta n dby mo de When the phone is ready f or use, and you have not keyed in any character s, the phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows the name of the network or t he operator logo t o indicat e in which ce llular network t he phone is currently being used. 2. Shows the signal strength of t he cellular network at your current loc ation. The higher the bar, t he stronger the signal. 3. Shows the battery charge level. T he higher the ba r, the more power in the battery 4. The left selection k ey in standby mode is Go t o . Press Go to to view the f unctions in your per sonal shortcut list. Select a function to ac tivate it.
You r phone 29 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Option s and sele ct ⢠Select 'Go to' opti ons to view t he list of available funct ions that you can add. Scroll t o the desired f unction and press Mar k to add it to the shortcut list. To remove a function f rom the list, press Un mark . ⢠Organise 'Go to' options to rearrange the functions on your pers onal shortcut list. Sel ect the desired function and press Mo ve , then select whe re you want t o move the function. See als o Go to options on page 102 . 5. The middle selection key in standby mode is Menu . 6. The right s election key in standby mode is Names t o acce ss the Contacts menu or another s hortcut to a function you c an select. Se e P e rsonal shortcuts on page 101 . Or the key has an operator-specifi c name t o access an operator- specific web sit e. See als o Essential indicators on page 30 . Wallpa per You can s et your phone to display a background picture, wallpaper, when the phone is in standby mode. See Display s ettings on page 10 2 . Scr e en s a ve r You can s et your phone to display a screen saver, when the phone is in standby mode. See Display settings on page 102 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 30 Power s aving For power saving, a digital clock view overwrites the display when no phone function has been us ed for a certain per iod of time. Press any ke y to deactiv ate the s creen s aver. If you have not set the time , 00:00 is displayed. To set t he time, see Time and date settings on page 104 . In addit ion you can set a s creen saver from Gallery . See Display set tings on page 102 . Essent ial in dicat ors You have receiv ed one or se veral text, pic ture messages or multimedia messages. See Reading and replying to an SMS message or an SM S e-mail on page 51 or Rea ding and replying to a mult imedia message on page 58 . The phone has registered a missed call. See Call register on page 81 . or Your phone is c onnected to t he instant mess ages service and the availability st atus is o nline or offline, r espectively . See Connecting t o and disconnecting fr om the instant mes saging service on page 63 . You have received one or se veral instant messages and you are connected to the ins tant messages s ervice. See Connecting to and dis connecting from the instant mes saging service on pa ge 63 . The phoneâÂÂs keypad is lock ed. See Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32 .
You r phone 31 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The phone does not ring for an incoming ca ll or text mes sage when Incoming call alert is s et to Off and Mes sage alert t one is set to Off . See Tone s ettings on page 100 . The alarm cloc k is s et to On . See Alarm clock on page 126 . The countdown timer is running. See Countdown timer on page 138 . The stopwatch is running in t he background. See Stopwatch on page 13 8 . When the (E)G PRS connection mode Always online is s elected and t he (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the t op left of t he display. Refer t o (E)GPRS connection on page 111 . When the (E)G PRS connection is es tablished, the indicat or is s hown on the top lef t of the dis play. Refe r to (E)GPRS connection on page 11 1 and Browsing the pages of a service on page 147 . The (E)GPRS connect ion is suspended (on hold), for exa mple if there is an incoming or outgoing call du ring the (E)G PRS dial-up connection. The indicator is show n on the top r ight of the dis play. Infrared connection indicator, see Infrared on page 10 9 . All your calls are diverted to a nother number, Div ert all voice calls . If y o u have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the f irst line is and for the second line . See Ca ll setti ngs on page 10 5 . or If you have two phone lines, the indicat or displays the se lected phone line. See Call settings on page 10 5 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 32 The loudspea ker has been activated, s ee Options during a call on page 36 . Calls are limited t o a clos ed user group. See Security s ettings on page 11 5 . The timed pr ofile is se lected. See Pr ofiles on page 99 . , , or A headset, handsfree, loopset or music stand is c onnected to the phone. To s et the phone to s how the time and date in standby mode, s ee Time and date settings on page 10 4 . â Key pad lock (Key guard ) You can lo ck the keypad to prevent the ke ys being ac cidentally pres sed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. ⢠Loc ki ng t h e k e ypa d In standby mode, press Me nu and then within 1.5 s econds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unloc k and then wit hin 1.5 seconds. To ans wer a call w hen the ke yguard is on, pr ess . During a ca ll, the phone can be operat ed normally. W hen you end or reject the call, the keypad will automatically be locked. For Automatic keyguard , see Phone se ttings on page 10 7 . For locking the keypad during a call, see Options during a call on page 36 .
You r phone 33 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. When the keypad lock is on, calls stil l may be possi ble to the offici al emerge ncy number programmed in to your de vice.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 34 3. Ca ll funct ion s â Mak in g a c al l 1. Key in the phone number, i ncluding the ar ea code. If you key in an incorrect char acter, press Clear to delete it. For inte rnational calls, pr ess twice for the internat ional prefix (the charact er replaces t he internati onal access code ) and then k ey in the count ry code, the area code without the leading 0, if nece ssary, and the phone number. 2. Press to call the number. 3. Press to end the call or to cancel t he call att empt. See als o Options during a call on page 36 . Making a call using the contacts To s earch for a name/phone number that you have saved in Contact s , see Searching f or a contact on page 87 . Press to call the number. Last number redialling In standby mode, press once to acc ess the list of up to 20 numbe rs you last called or attempted to c all. Scroll to the number or name that you want, and pre ss to call the number. Calling your voice mailbox In standby mode, press a nd hold , or press and .
Call fu ncti on s 35 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If the phone asks f or the voice mailbox number, key it in and press OK . See also Voice messages on page 74 . Speed diallin g a phon e number Before you can use spee d dialling, assign a phone number to one of the spe ed- dialling keys , from to , see Speed dials on page 95 . C all the number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the speed-dialling key that you want and t hen press . â¢I f Speed dialling is set to on, pr ess and hold a speed-dialling key until the call is started. See Call settings on page 105 . â Answ eri n g or r eje ct in g an inco mi n g ca ll Press t o answer an inc oming call and pr ess to end the call. Press to re ject an incoming call. If you press Silence , only the ringing tone is muted. Then eit her answer or r eject the call. If a compatible headset supplied with the headset key is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the key. Tip: If the Diver t if busy f unction is acti vated to div ert the calls , for example t o your voice ma ilbox, rejecting an incoming call will also div ert the ca ll. See Call s ettings on page 10 5 . Note t hat when somebody is calling y ou, the phone shows the c allerâÂÂs name, phone number or the text Private number or Call . If more than one name is found
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 36 in Contacts wit h the same la st seven digit s of the phone number as the callerâÂÂs number, only t he phone number wi ll be displaye d, if this is available. The phone may dis play an incorr ect name, if the cal lerâÂÂs number is not saved in Contacts but there i s another name saved with the same last eight digits in the phone number as in the phone number of t he caller. Ca ll wa iti ng During a c all, press to answer the waiting c all. The first call is put on hold. Pres s to end the active call. To ac tiva te the Call waiting function, s ee Call sett ings on page 105 . â Options d urin g a ca ll Many of t he options that y ou can use during a cal l are network services. For availability, contact your network operator or ser vice provider. Press Option s during a call for some of the following opt ions: ⢠Mute or Unmute , Contacts , Menu , Reco rd , and the net work service s Answer and Reje ct , Hold or Unhold , New call , End call , End all calls . ⢠Lock k eypad to act ivate th e keypad l ock. ⢠Send DTMF to send DTMF (Dual Tone Mult i-Frequency) t one strings, for example, password s or bank account numbers ( network service). The DTMF system is used by all touch-tone telephones . Key in the D TMF string or s earch for it in Cont ac ts and press DTMF . Not e that you c an ke y in the wait char acter w and th e pause char acter p by repeatedly pressing .
Call fu ncti on s 37 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and disconnect yourself from both calls (network s ervi ces). ⢠Confer ence to call another par ty and invite them into t he call (network servi ce) . ⢠Priv ate call to have a private conversation with one participant in a conference call (networ k service). ⢠Auto volume on or Auto volume off . Automatic volume controls the ea rpiece volume lev el according to t he environment nois e level. ⢠Loudspeaker to use the integrated loudspeaker during a call to have the handsfree function of your phone. Note : Do not hold t he device near your e ar when the loudspeaker is in use, beca use the volume ma y be extremely loud. To ac tivate/deactivate the loudspeaker , select Loudspeaker / Handset or press Lou d sp . / Normal . The loudspeaker is automatically deactivated when you end the call or call att empt or connec t the handsfree unit or headset t o the phone. If you have connected a compatible handsfree unit or the headset t o the phone, Handset in the options list is replaced with Handsf ree or H eadset and the selection key Normal with Hands f. or Head s. , re s pe ct i vel y . Using t he loudspeaker w ith the radio, see Using the radio on page 123 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 38 4. Wr it ing t ext You can k ey in text, for example, when writing messages, using tradit ional or predictiv e text input. When you are writing text , predi ctive text input is indicated by and traditional t ext input by at the top left of the display. T he charac ter case is indicat ed by , , or next to t he text input indicator. You can change t he charact er case by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you c an change bet ween the letter and number mode by pressing and holding . â Set ting pre dicti ve te xt in put on or off When writing text, press O ptions and se lect Dictionary . ⢠To s et predictive t ext input on, select a la nguage in the dictionary options list. Predictiv e text input is only available for the languages on the lis t. ⢠To r evert to t raditional text input, select Dictionary of f . Tip: To quick ly set pr edictive tex t input on or off when writing t ext, press twice, or press and hold Options . â Us ing pre dictiv e text input You can key in any letter with a single keypress. Predict ive text input is bas ed on a built-in dictionary to whic h you can als o add new w ords.
Writ ing te xt 39 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 1. Start writing a w ord using the keys to . Pr ess each key only once for a single letter. The word changes after each keystroke. Example: To write Nokia w hen the Englis h dictionary i s selected, press , , , an d . For mor e instructions on writing text, see Tips for writ ing text on pa ge 40 . 2. When you have finished writ ing the word and it is correct, confirm it by adding a spa ce with or by moving the joy stick up, down, left or right. Moving the joystick als o moves the c ursor. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly or press Options an d s el e c t Matches . When the w ord that you want appears, confirm it. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the wor d you intended to write is not in the dictionary. T o add the word to t he dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (traditional t ext input is us ed) and press Save . When the dictionary becomes full, the new word replac es the oldest one that was added. 3. Start writing the next word. Writing com pound word s Key in the first part of the word and move the joystick to the r ight, then write the last par t of the wor d. â Us ing tra ditio nal t ext inpu t Press a number key, to , r epeatedly unti l the desire d character appears. Not all char acters available under a number key are printed on the k ey.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 40 The c haracters ava ilable depend on the l anguage select ed in the Phone language menu, s ee Phone s ettings on page 10 7 . ⢠If t he next let ter you want is locate d on the same k ey as the present one, wait until the cursor appea rs, or move the joy stick up, down, left or right and then key in the lette r. ⢠The most common punctuation marks and special characters are available under the number key . For mor e instructions on writing text , see Tips for wr iting text on pa ge 40 . â Tips for wri ting te xt The following functions may also be av ailable for writing t ext: ⢠To ins ert a space, press . ⢠Move the cursor to the left, right, down or up with the joystick. ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, press and hold the desir ed number key. ⢠To dele te a cha racter to the left o f the cursor, pr ess Cle a r . Press and hold Clear to de lete the charac ters more quick ly. To dele te all the c haracters at once when writing a message , press Options and sel ect Clear text . ⢠To ins ert a word whe n using predict ive text input, p ress Options and select Insert wor d . Write the word using traditional text input and press Save . T he word is also added to the dictionary.
Writ ing te xt 41 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠To ins ert a special c haracter when us ing traditional t ext input, press , or when us ing predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options an d sel ect Insert sy mbol . Use t he joystick to scroll to a charact er and pre ss Use to sele ct the charac ter. You can a lso scroll to a charact er by press ing , , or , and selec t the character by pr essing . ⢠To ins ert a smiley whe n using traditional t ext input, p ress t wice, or whe n using predic tive text input , press and hold and press again, or press Options and select Insert smiley . Use t he joystick to scroll to a smiley and press Use to select the smiley. You can a lso scroll to a charact er by press ing , , or , and selec t the character by pr essing . The following options are available when w riting text me ssages: ⢠To ins ert a number while in letter mode, press Options and select Insert number . Key in the phone number or s earch for it in Contacts and press OK . ⢠To ins ert a name from Contacts , pr ess Options and select Insert contact . To insert a phone number or a text item attached t o the name, pr ess Options and sel ect View details .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 42 5. Using the menu The phone offers you an extensive r ange of fu nctions, which are grouped into menus. Most of the menu funct ions are pr ovided with a br ief help t ext. To view the help text, scr oll to the menu function you wa nt and wait for 15 seconds. T o exit the help text, press Back . See Phone settings on page 107 . â Acce ssin g a me nu fu nc tio n 1. To ac cess the menu, press Menu . 2. Use t he joystick to scroll thr ough the menu and select, for example, Se ttings by pressing Selec t . To change the menu v iew, see Menu view in Display settings on page 102 . 3. If the menu cont ains submenus, select the one that you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected s ubmenu contains furthe r submenus, repeat step 3. Select the next submenu, for example A nykey answer . 5. Select the setting of your choice . 6. Press Back to retur n to the previous menu level, and Exit to exi t the menu .
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 43 â Lis t of me nu fu nctio ns ⢠Messages 1. Create message 1. Text message 2. Multimedia ms g. 3. Flash mes sage 2. Inbox 3. O utbox 4. Sent items 5. Saved items 1. Text messages 2. Multimedia ms gs. 6. Instan t mess age s 1. L ogin 2. Save d convers. 3. Connect. s ettings 7. E-mail 1 1. Create e-ma il 2. Retrieve 3. Disc onnect 4. Inbox 5. Other f olders 8. V oice me ssages 1. Lis ten to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox number 9. I nfo messages 1. In fo se rv ic e 2. T opics 3. La nguage 4. Info topics saved on SIM card 5. Re ad 2 10.Service c ommands 11.Delete messages 12.Message settings 1. Text me ssages 2. Multimedia msgs. 3. E-mail messages 4. Other s etti ngs 1. In so me co untrie s thi s func tion m ay no t be a vailabl e. 2. This me nu i s s hown only if an y inf o me ssag e s ar e re c eive d.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 44 ⢠Call register 1. Missed calls 2. Receive d calls 3. Dialled number s 4. Delete recent ca ll lists 1. All 2. Mis sed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call durat ion 1. Last call duration 2. Receiv ed calls' duration 3. Dialled c alls' duration 4. All ca lls' duration 5. Clear timers 6. GPRS data counter 1. Data sent in last session 2. D ata received in las t session 3. All s ent data 4. All recei ved data 5. Clear counters 7. G PRS connection timer 1. Duration of las t session 2. Duration of all sessions 3. Clear timers ⢠Contacts 1. Search 2. A dd new contact 3. Delete 4. M y presence 5. Su bscribed names 6. Copy 7. Settings 1. Memory in us e 2. Co nt ac ts vi ew 3. Memory s tatus 8. Speed dials 9. V oice t ags 10.Info numbers 1 11.Service numbe rs 1 12.My numbers 2 13.Caller groups 2 1. Shown i f su ppor te d by yo ur S I M card. For av ail abil ity , c ont act y ou r net work oper ato r or ser v- ice provi der . 2. If Info num bers, Serv ice nu mbers o r both a re not s upporte d, the nu mber of this m enu item chang es a ccor di ngl y.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 45 ⢠Settings 1. Pr ofiles 1. General 2. Silent 3. Meeting 4. Outdoor 5. My style 1 6. My style 2 2. Themes 1. Selec t theme 2. Theme downloads 3. Tone settings 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ringing tone 3. Ringing volume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Mess age alert tone 6. Instant message alert tone 7. Keypad tones 8. Warning tones 9. Alert for 4. Pe rsonal shortcut s 1. Right selection key 2. Selec t 'Go t o' options 3. Organise 'Go to' options 4. Voice commands 5. D isplay settings 1. W allpaper 2. Scr een saver 3. Colour schemes 4. Menu view 5. Operator logo 6. T ime and date s ettings 1. Clock 2. Da te 3. Auto-update of date & time 7. C all settings 1. Automatic volume control 2. Call dive rt 3. A nykey answer 4. Automatic redial 5. Speed d ialling 6. Call wait ing 7. Summar y after call 8. Send my caller ID 9. Line for outgoing calls 1 8. Ph one settings 1. Phone language 2. A utomatic keyguard 3. Cell info dis play 1. For av ail abi lity , conta ct your netw ork o pe rat or or ser vice prov ide r.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 46 4. Welcome note 5. O perator selection 6. Confirm SIM service actions 7. He lp text activat ion 8. Start-up tone 9. Conn ectivity 1. Infr ared 2. GPR S 10.Enhancement settings 1 1. H eadset 2. H andsfree 3. Loopset 11.Configuration settings 1. Default configuration settings 2. Act ivate default in all applications 3. Pref erred access point 4. Pe rsonal configurat ion settings 12.Security settings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barr ing service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed user group 5. Secur ity level 6. A ccess codes 13.Restore factory s ettings â¢O p e r a t o r m e n u 2 ⢠Gallery 1. Images 2. V ideo clips 3. Themes 4. Graphics 5. Tones 6. Recordings â¢M e d i a 1. Camera 2. Radio 3. V oice r ecorder 1. Thi s me nu is sh own only if t he p hone is o r h as bee n c onne cted t o a com pati ble e nhan ceme nt ava ilable for the phon e. 2. If thi s men u is n ot sho wn t he s ubsequ ent m enu numb ers c hanges acco rdingly . The nam e de - pends o n th e net work op era tor.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 47 â¢O r g a n i s e r 1. Alarm clock 1. Alarm t ime 2. Repeat alarm 3. Alarm tone 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 4. N otes 5. Synchronisation ⢠Applications 1. G ames 1. Selec t game 2. Game downloa ds 3. Memory 4. App. s ettings 2. Collection 1. Selec t application 2. App. dow nloads 3. Memory 3. Extras 1. Calculator 2. Countdown t imer 3. Stopwatch 4. W allet ⢠Service s 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. D ownload links 1. Tone downloads 2. Graphic downloads 3. Game downloads 4. Video downlo ads 5. Theme downloads 6. App. downloads 4. L ast web addr . 5. Ser vice inbox 6. Settings 1. Configuration settings 2. Appear ance settings 3. Secur ity settings 4. Service inbox settings 7. G o to address 8. C lear the cache ⢠SIM services 1 1. Only show n if su pport ed by yo ur S I M card . Th e n ame a nd c ont ents var y de pen ding on t he SIM card.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 48 6. Menu functions â Messa ges The mes sage services can only be used if they are supported by your net work or yo ur service pr ovider. You can read, write, s end and save t ext, multimedia and SMS e-mail me ssages (network se rvices). All message s are organised into folders. To s elect the font size for reading and writing mes sages, pres s Menu , and select Messages , M essage settings , Oth er se tt ing s and Font size . Not e: When sendi ng message s, your phone ma y display the words Me s sag e s e nt . This is a n indicatio n that th e messag e has been sen t by your de vice to the mes sage centre number p rogrammed i nto your device. This is not an indica tion that th e messag e has been rec eived at the intende d destin ation. Fo r more details about messag ing servic es, check with your service provid er. Tex t m ess ag e s (S MS) Using t he SMS (Short Message Servic e) your phone can send and receiv e multi- part messages, which consist of several ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing may be based on t he number of ordinar y messages that are r equired for a multi-part message. This may affect the invoicing for the message. Before y ou can send a mes sage, you need to save some message settings. See Settings for text and SMS e-mail messages on page 76 .
Menu func t ions 49 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. You can a lso send and receive t ext messages that contain pictures. A pic ture message c an be a mult i-part message. Not e: Only device s th at offer pictu re me ssage featu res ca n receive an d dis play pictur e mess ages . The t ext messages funct ion uses shar ed memory, s ee Shared memory on page 14 . Writin g and s ending messa ges Your d evice support s the sending of t ext messag es beyond the norma l 160-char acter limit. If yo ur m ess age exc eed s 1 60 ch ar acte rs, it w ill be s ent as a ser ies of tw o o r mo re m ess ages . The num ber of available cha racters / the current part number of a mu lti-part message are show n on the top rig ht of th e displa y, for examp le 120/2. Note that usi ng speci al (Unic ode) ch ara cter s suc h as ë , â, á, ì tak e up mor e sp ace . 1. Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Text message . Tip: To star t writing mess ages quickly, mov e the joy stick to the left in standby mode. 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38 . To ins ert text templat es or a picture into the message, see T emplates on page 52 . Each picture message comprises several text messages. Therefore, s ending one pict ure message, as well as other multipart messages may cost more than sending one text message. 3. To s end the message, pres s Sen d or . The mes sages that you have sent will be s aved in th e Sent items f older if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for text and SMS e-ma il messages on page 76 . Text messages ar e indicated wit h .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 50 4. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or sear ch for the phone number in Contacts . Press OK to send the m essa ge. Options for sendin g a mes sag e After you have w ritten a message, press Options and select Sending options . ⢠To s end a message t o several recipients, select Send to many . When you have sent t he message to eve ryone you want to send it to, press Done . Note that a separate mes sage is se nt to each of t he recipients. ⢠To s end a message as an SMS e-mail (network s ervice), selec t Send as e-mail . Key in the recipient âÂÂs e-mail addr ess or search f or it in Contacts and press OK . If you wis h, you can key in a s ubject for the SMS e-mail a nd press OK . Key in the e-mail message. See Writing te xt on page 38 . The total number of charact ers that you can key in is shown o n the top right of the displa y. The e- mail addres s and subject are included in t he total number of characters. See als o T emplates on page 52 . Pict ures cannot be ins erted. To send t he SMS e-mail, press Send . If you have not saved t he settings for sending SMS e-mails, the phone asks for the numbe r of the e-mai l server. Press OK to send t he e-mail. ⢠To s end a message using a message profile, select Sending profile and the n the desired me ssage profile. To define a message profile, s ee Settings for text and SMS e-mail messages on page 76 .
Menu func t ions 51 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Reading and r eplyi ng to an SM S messag e or a n SMS e-ma il When you have receiv ed a message or an SMS e- mail, the indic ator and the number of new messages followed by messages received ar e shown. The blink ing indicates t hat the message me mory is f ull. Before you can receive new mes sages, delet e some of yo ur old messages in the Inbox folder. 1. Press Show to vie w the new mes sage, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message late r: Press Menu , and select Messages and Inbox . 2. If more than one messag e has been received, se lect the one that you want to read. An unread t ext messa ge or SMS e-mail is indic ated by . Options while reading the message: Press Option s and sele ct an option, for example, to delete, fo rward or edit t he message as a text message or a n SMS e-mail, rename the message you are reading or to move it to another f older. Select Copy to cale ndar t o copy text at t he beginning of the message to your phoneâÂÂs calendar as a reminder note for the current day. Select Message details t o view, if av ailable, the senderâÂÂs name and phone number, the message centre used, and t he date and time of receipt. Select Use detail to extract numbers, e-mail addresses and website addresses from the c urrent message . Tip: While reading a message , press the key t o extract number s, e- mail address es and website addr esses from the current message.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 52 When reading a picture message, selec t Save picture to sav e th e pictu re in the Templates f older. 3. Select Reply and t he message ty pe to reply to a messa ge. When replying to an SMS e-mail, confirm or edit the e- mail address and subject f irst. Th en write y our reply messa ge. 4. To s end the message, pres s Sen d , and press OK to send the mess age to the displaye d number. Inbox and sen t it ems fo lder s The phone saves incoming t ext and multimedi a messages in the Inbox folder. Sent text messages are saved in th e Sent items f older. Text mes sages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Saved text msgs. , My folders or Templat es folder. Templat es Your phone includes text t emplates, indicated by , and picture templates, indicat ed by . To ac cess the t emplate list , press Menu , and s elect Messages , Saved items , T ext messages and Templates . ⢠To ins ert a text template into t he message or t he SMS e-mail that you are writing or replying to, pres s Options . Select Use templat e and select the template that you want t o insert. ⢠To ins ert a pictur e into the text message t hat you are writing or re plying to, press Option s . Select Insert picture and select a pic ture to v iew it. Pre ss Insert
Menu func t ions 53 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. to inser t the pictur e into your me ssage. The indicator in t he header of the message indic ates that a pic ture has been attached. The number of characters that you can enter in a messa ge depends on the size of th e picture. To vie w the text and the pict ure togethe r before sending the message, press Options and select Preview . Saved it ems folder and My f old er s To organise your messages, you c an move some of t hem to the Saved items folder, or add new folders f or your me ssages. While reading a message, pr ess Options . Select Mov e , scroll to t he folder that you want to move the message to and press Select . To add or delete a folder, press Menu , and select Messages , Saved items , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder if you have not saved any folder, press Add . Otherwise, press Options and select Add f older . ⢠To dele te a folder, s croll to the f older that you want t o delete, pre ss O ptions and se lect Delete folder . Flash messages Flash messages are t ext message s that are displayed instant ly. Writin g a fl as h message Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Flash message . For further opera tion, see Writing and sending messages on page 49 . The maximum length of
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 54 a flash message is 70 characters. To insert a blinking te xt into the message, select Insert blink char . from the opt ions list to set a marker. The text behind t he marker blinks until a second marker is inserted. Not e: Only devices that offer compat ible flash message features can receive and displ ay blinking flash mess ages. Receiv in g a flas h mess age A received flash mess age is not automati cally save d. To read th e message, pres s Read . Press Options and select Us e detail to extract phone numbers, e -mail addresse s and website addresses from the current message. To s ave the mess age, press Save and select t he folder in w hich you want to save the message. Multimedia mess ages (MMS) Not e: Onl y device s that offer compatib le mu ltimedi a message feat ures c an receive and disp lay multime dia mes sages. A multimedia message can contain text, sound and a picture or a video clip. The phone supports multimedia messages t hat are up to 100 KB in size. If the maximum s ize is exceeded, the phone may not be able to rec eive the message. Dependi ng on the network, you ma y receive a text message t hat include s an Internet addr ess where you can v iew the multimedia message. If the message contains a picture in compatible f ormat, the phone may scale it down t o fit the displa y area. The multimedia message funct ion uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 .
Menu func t ions 55 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If Allow multimedia recept ion is se t to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may cha rge you for every mes sage you receiv e. The default set ting to rec eive multimedia mes sages is generally on. See Settings for mult imedia messages on page 77 . Multimedia messaging supports the f ollowing formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BMP and PNG. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI), AMR audio and monophonic ringing tones. ⢠Video clips in 3gp f ormat with SubQCIF and QCIF resolution and AMR audio. The phone does not necessarily support all variations of the aforementioned file formats. If a rece ived message cont ains any unsupported elements, t hey may be replaced w ith the file name and t he text Object format not supported . Note t hat you are not able to r eceive any mult imedia messages if you have a call in progress, or a game or another Java application running. Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of r easons, do not rely solely upon t hem for esse ntial communications. Writ ing an d sendi ng a mu ltim edia mess age To set the settings f or multimedia messaging, see Settings for multi media messages on page 77 . T o chec k availabilit y and to subs cribe to th e multimedia messaging s ervice, cont act your ne twork operator or service provider. Copyright protect ions may prev ent some images, ringing tones and ot her content from bei ng copied, modified, t ransferred or f orwarded. 1. Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Mult imedia msg. .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 56 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38 . ⢠To ins ert a file in the message, press Options , select Inse rt and select the desired option. You cannot s elect an option if it is dimmed. The list of available folder s in the Gallery is shown. Open a specific folder, scroll to the desired file, press Options and select Insert . An attached file is indicated with the file name in the message . Please note that you cannot insert a theme in a new message. To move the text component to the t op or bottom of the me ssage, press Options and select Place t ext first or Place text la st . ⢠Your phone supports the sending and receiving of multimedia mess ages that cont ain several pages (slides). To ins ert a slide in t he message, pr ess Options , and select Insert and Slide . Each slide ca n contain text , one image and one s ound clip. If the message contains s everal slides , you can open the des ired one by pressing O ptions and select ing Previous slide , Next slide or Slide list . To change the time a slide will be displayed in a slide pres entation select the slide, press Options and select Slide t iming . To change the default value see Default slide timing in Sett ings for multimedia messages on page 77 . ⢠To ins ert a name from the contacts lis t, press Options and select More options , Ins ert contact and the des ired name. To ins ert a number from t he contacts list, press Options and select More options and Ins ert number .
Menu func t ions 57 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠To ins ert a cale ndar note, press Options and select Insert and Calendar note . ⢠To ins ert a business car d, press Options an d se le ct Insert and B usin ess card . ⢠To de lete an image, s lide or s ound clip fr om the message, press Opti ons and sel ect Dele te and the des ired function. ⢠To save the message in the Saved items folder , press Op ti ons and select Save mes sage . ⢠To a dd a subject to the mess age, press Options and select More options and Edit subject . ⢠To view for example t he size or recipient of the message, press Options and sel ect More options and Message details . 3. To vie w the messa ge or slide pres entation before sending it, press Options and sel ect Preview . 4. T o se nd the mess age , p ress Send , or pr ess Options and select Send to e-mail or Send to many . 5. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number (or e-mail addr ess) or search for it in Contacts . Press OK and the message is moved to t he Outbox folder for s ending. It take s more time to send a multimedia message than t o send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated indicator is displaye d and you can use other functions on the phone. If there is an interruption w hile the message is being sent, the phone t ries to resend it a f ew times. If t his fails, the mes sage will remain in the Outbox folder and you can tr y to resend it later.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 58 The mes sages that you have sent will be s aved in th e Sent items f older if the setting Save sent messages is s et to Yes . See Settings for multimedia mes sages on page 77 . Multimedia mes sages are indicat ed with . Readin g an d repl yin g to a m ult ime dia me ssage Imp ortan t: Multi media mess age obje cts may contain viruses o r otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. Do not o pen any attachme nt if you are not sure o f the trustwo rthines s of the se nder. When your phone is rece iving a multimedi a message, t he animated indicat or is displayed. When t he message has been received, the indicator and the text Multimedia message received are shown. The blink ing indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, s ee Multimedia messages memory full on page 60 . The appearance o f a multim edia messa ge may vary depending on the receivi ng device. 1. Press Show to vie w the message, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Pres s Men u , and select Messages and Inbox . An unread multime dia message is indicated by . 2. Scrol l to view t he message. Pr ess Options and, for example, some of the following options may be available. ⢠Play pr esentation to view th e presentation a ttached in the mes sage. ⢠View t ext to view only the text in the message. ⢠Open image , Open sound clip or Open video clip to open the corresponding file.
Menu func t ions 59 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Save image , Save sound clip or Save video clip to s ave the co rresponding file in the Gallery . ⢠Details to view the details of t he attached file. ⢠Delete me ssage to delete a s aved message. ⢠Reply or Reply to all to reply to t he mess age. To send t he reply, pr ess Options and select Send . ⢠Forward to no. , Forward to e-mail or Forward t o many to for war d th e message. ⢠Edit to edit a message. You c an only edit messages y ou have creat ed. See Writing and s ending a multimedia mes sage on page 55 . ⢠Message deta ils to view t he subject , size and t he type of message. ⢠Refer a lso to the options in Gallery , see Gallery on page 11 7 . Inbox, Outb ox, Sav ed and Sent it ems fo lder s The phone saves the multimedia messages t hat have been received in the Inbox folder. Multimedia messages that have not yet been s ent are moved to the Outbox folder. The multimedia messages that you wish to send later can be s aved in the Saved items folder. The multimedia mes sages that have been sent a re saved in the Sent items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for multimedia messages on page 77 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 60 Mult imed ia me ssa ges me mory full When you have a ne w multimedia mess age waiting and t he memory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, v iew waiting msg. is shown. To view t he waiting message, press Show . To save the message, pr ess Options , select Save message and delete old messages b y first selecting the folder and t hen the oId message to be delet ed. To dis card the wa iting message, press Exit and Yes . If you pr ess No , you can view the message. Insta nt m ess age s (Ch a t) Instant messaging (Chat) is a way of sending s hort, simple text me ssages that are delivered ov er TCP/IP protocols to online user s (network service). Your contact lis t shows you when the c ontacts on the l ist are online and available to participate in an instant messages convers ation. When you have written and sent your message, it st ays on the dis play. The reply message appear s below your original messa ge. Before y ou can use instant messaging, you need to subs cribe to the service. For availability, char ging and s ubscription to the service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you also rece ive your unique ID and passwor d and the settings for ins tant messaging. For s etting the re quired settings for th e instant mess aging service, see Instant messaging settings on page 69 . The icons and texts on the display may vary depending on the ins tant messaging servi ce. You can us e the other functions of the phone while yo u have an active instant messaging s ession in the b ackground. Depending on the network, the acti ve
Menu func t ions 61 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. instant messaging session may consume the phoneâ s battery f aster and you may need t o connect the phone t o a char ger. Instant messaging uses shared me mory, see Shared memory on p age 14 . Basic steps for the instant messaging ⢠To ent er the instant me ssaging menu (offline), s ee Ente ri ng th e in stan t messaging menu on page 62 . ⢠To conne ct to the service (online), see Connecting to and disconne cting from the instant messaging service on page 63 . ⢠To start a conversation with a contact, see IM cont acts in Starting an instant messaging conv ersation on page 63 . To create your own contact lists, see Contacts for instant messa ging on page 67 . ⢠To join a public group, see Groups in Starting an instant messaging conversation on page 63 . To join an instant messaging group via an invit ation message, see Accepting or rejecting an invitation on page 64 . To creat e your own gr oup, or to join or delete a public group, see G roups on page 68 . ⢠To edit your own infor mation, see Editing your own s ettings on page 66 . ⢠To s earch users and groups, see Search in Starting an instant messaging conversation on page 63 . ⢠To r ead a message, see Reading an instant mes sage on page 65 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 62 ⢠To wr ite and send messages during an a ctive session, s ee P articipating in a conversation on page 66 . ⢠To view, r ename or delete saved conversations, select Saved convers. whe n yo u have entered the Instant messages menu. ⢠To block /unblock c ontacts, see Bloc king and unblocking mes sages on page 68 . ⢠To dis connect from t he service, see Connecting to and disconnecting f rom the instant messaging service on page 63 . En ter ing the ins tant mes sag ing men u To enter th e Instant messages menu while still offline , press Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . Activat e a service and then select ⢠Login to conne ct to the service. To s et the phone to aut omatically connec t to the service when you enter the Instant messages menu, see Connecting to and disconnec ting from the instant messaging s ervice on page 63 . ⢠Saved conve rs. to view, erase or r ename the conversat ions that you have saved during a se ssion. You can select Saved conve rs. also whe n you have connected to the se rvice. ⢠Connect. settings to a ccess the se ttin gs ne eded fo r a conne cti on. S ee Instant messaging settings on page 69 . You c an select Connect. settings also w hen you have c onnected to t he service.
Menu func t ions 63 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Connecti ng to and dis connect in g from the ins tant mes sag ing ser vice To connect to the service, enter the Instant messages menu, activat e a service and sel ect Login . Select one of the available s ets. If necessar y key in the Us er ID : and the Pas s w o r d : . W hen the phone has successfully connected, Logged in is displayed. Tip: To se t the phone to automatically connect to t he instant mess aging service when y ou enter the Instant me ssages menu, connect to the serv ice, sel ect My settings , Automatic login and On I M s tar t- up . To disconnect from the service, select Logout . St art in g an in st ant me ssag i ng c on vers ati on Ent e r t he I nstant messages me nu and connect to a s ervice. You can select ⢠Conversations to view t he list of new and read messages or invitations to instant me ssaging during the active s ession. Scroll to t he message or i nvitation that you want and press Open to rea d the me ssa ge. indicates the new and the read ins tant messages. indicates the ne w and the read group messages. indicates the invitations. ⢠IM contacts i ncl udes the cont act s that y ou hav e adde d. S cro ll to the c onta ct to whom you would like to send instant messages and press Cha t or press Ope n if a new message is s hown in the list. If you have receiv ed a new mes sage from a c ontact, it is indicated with . indicates the online and the offline contacts in the phoneâ s contacts memory.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 64 indicates a b locked contac t, refer to Blocking and unbloc king messages on page 68 . To add contacts to t he list , see Contacts for instant messaging on page 67 . ⢠Groups and Public groups . The list of bookmarks t o public groups provided by the network operator or service provider is displaye d. T o start a conversation, scroll to a group and pres s Join . E nter the s creen name th at you want to use in the conversa tion. When you have successfully joined in the group conversation, the phone shows Joined group: and the g roup name. T o create a private group, see Groups on page 68 . ⢠Search and select Us er s or Groups to search f or other users or public groups on the ne t work. ⢠If you select Use rs , you can search for a user by phone number, sc reen name, e- mail address or name. ⢠If you select Grou ps , you can sear ch for a group by a member in the group or by gr oup name, topic or ID. To start t he session when you hav e found the user or the group th at you want , press Option s and sele ct Chat or J oin group . ⢠To s tart a session fr om Contacts, see Viewing t he subscribed names on page 92 . Accepti ng or reje cti ng an inv it ation In standby mode, when you have c onnected to t he service and you receive a new invitation, New invitation received is displayed. Pr ess Read to re ad it.
Menu func t ions 65 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If more than one invi tation is recei ved, the number of messages followed by new invitations received is displayed. Pr ess Re a d , scroll t o an invita tion that you want and pr ess Op en . ⢠To join the private gr oup conversation, pr ess Acce pt . Ente r th e sc ree n nam e that you want to use as a nic kname. When you hav e succes sfully joined th e group, the phone shows Joined group: and the group name. ⢠To r eject or delete the invi tation, press Options and sele ct Reject or Delete . Readin g a n in stant m essa ge In standby mode, when you have c onnected to t he service and you receive a message f rom a person who is not tak ing part in the c onversation, New in stant message is displayed. Press Read to rea d it. If more than one messag e is receiv ed, the number of messages followed by new instant messages is displayed. Press Read , scroll to a message and press Open . New messages receiv ed during an active ses sion are held in the Conversations of the Instant messages menu. If the mes sage is f rom a person whos e contact information is missing from the cont act list in IM c ontacts , the s enderâÂÂs ID i s shown. If the contact information can be found in the phoneâÂÂs memory for contacts and the phone r ecognises it , the senderâÂÂs name is sh own. To save a new contact in the phoneâÂÂs memor y, press Options and s elect ⢠Save cont act and enter the name of the person. ⢠Add to contact and select the contact t o which you want to add t he detail and press Add .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 66 Pa rtic ipa tin g in a co nv er sat ion Join or s tart a sessi on by pressing Wr ite . Tip: If you receive a new me ssage d uring a conver sation from a person that is not wit hin the active conversat ion, the indicator is shown on the top of the dis play and a a larm tone is played. Write your message and press Send or to send it. If you press O ptions , some of the following options are availa ble: ⢠View c onversation to view the ongoing conversation. To save the conversation, press Save and enter a name for the conve rsation. ⢠Save cont act , re fer to Reading an instant message on pa ge 65 . ⢠Add to contact , r efe r to Reading an insta nt message on page 65 . ⢠Group members to view the member s of the s elected priva te group. The option is only shown if you have create d the group. ⢠End conver sation to end the ongoing convers ation. ⢠Dictionar y re fer to Writing t ext on page 38 . Editi ng your own s et tings Ent e r t he Instant messages menu and connect to the service. Select My settings to view and e dit your own availability inf ormation or screen name. Select A vailability and A v ailable for all or A vail. for contacts (or Appear offline ) to allow all the other users or only th e contacts on your contact list to see that you are online when you have c onnected to t he service. When you are connec ted to the service, indicat es that you are online and that you are not visible to others.
Menu func t ions 67 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Contact s fo r inst ant messagi ng To add contacts to t he instant messaging contacts lis t, connect t o the service and sel ect IM c o nt ac ts . If the contacts list is empty the phone displays Contact lis t empty . Copy contacts from serv er? to retrieve available contact s from the s erver. Other wise press Options and select Add contact , or if y ou have no contact s added, press Add . Select ⢠Enter ID manually to ente r th e ID m anu al ly. ⢠Search f rom serv . to search for a contac t from the serve r. ⢠From contacts to sea rch for a name in Con ta ct s . ⢠Copy from server to c opy a name f rom a server-ba sed contacts lis t. When the contact is added, the phone displays A dded to IM contacts: and the contact name. Scroll t o a contact, and pr ess Chat to start a session or press Options a nd select ⢠Contact info to view the de tails of t he selected contact . If you want to edit the details, s ee Editing or deleting det ails in the Con ta ct s menu (menu 3) on page 88 . ⢠Edit name to edi t the c onta ctâ s nam e. ⢠Block cont act (or Unblock contact ) to block (or unbloc k) the messa ges from the sele ct ed co nta ct. ⢠Add contact to add a new c ontact from t he phoneâÂÂs conta ct memory. ⢠Remove contact to remove a contact from the conta ct list.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 68 ⢠Copy to server to copy a name t o a serve r-based contact s list. ⢠A vailability alerts to mark those contacts from whom you wis h to receiv e availability aler ts. Blocki ng an d unbloc kin g mess ages Connect to the service and s elect Conversations or IM cont acts . Highlight t he contact in the contacts list from whom you want to block incoming mes sages. Press Option s , selec t Block contact and press OK . To unblock the message s, connect t o the s ervice and s elect Blocked list . Scroll to the contact from whom you want to unblock the mes sages and press U nblock . You can a lso unblock the me ssages from the contact list, see Contacts fo r instant messaging on page 67 . Groups You can c reate your own private groups for a session, or use the public groups provided by the servi ce provider. The private groups e xist only during an a ctive session. You can add t o a private gr oup only the contacts that ar e in your contact list and t hus in the phoneâ s contacts memory, see Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact ) on page 84 . If the server you are logged onto doe s not support group services all groups related menus are dimmed. Public groups You can boo kmark public groups that your service provider may maintain. Connect to t he service, se lect Groups and Public groups . Scroll to a group that you want to chat with and pr ess Join . If you are not in t he group, key in your screen
Menu func t ions 69 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. name as your nickname for the group. If you press Options , you can selec t De lete group to delete a group f rom your group list. Creating a private group Connect to the service, select Groups and Create group . Key in the name for the group and t he screen name that you want to use for the group. You can use another s creen name in a nother group. Ma rk your private group members from the contacts list and k ey in an invit ation to newly added members. In stan t m ess a gin g se ttin gs You may receive the settings as a configuration message from the network operator or service provider. To r eceive the s ettings as a c onfiguration message, see Configur ation settings service on page 17 . To key in the settings manually, see Configuration settings on page 11 3 . F or the instant messaging and pr esence settings, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. To enter th e Instant messages menu while still offline , press Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . Activat e a service and select Connect. settings . Select ⢠Configuration and scroll to the set you w ould like to activate a nd press Selec t. ⢠Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If more than one account is displayed c hoose the one y ou want to us e. ⢠User ID to v i e w o r to e d i t t h e us e r I D. ⢠Pas s wo rd to enter the pass word .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 70 E-mail applica tion The e- mail applicat ion allows you to access the compatible e-mail account t hat you us e in the office or at home, via the phone (networ k service). You can write , send, and read e-mails with your phone. Your phone supports POP3 and IMAP4 e- mail se rvers. The e- mail applicat ion uses shared memory, see Shared me mory on page 14 . Before y ou can send and r etrieve any e- mails, you ma y need to do the following: ⢠Obtain a new e-mail ac count or use the curr ent one. To c heck the availability of your e-mail acc ount contact your e- mail service provider. ⢠To che ck the settings required for the e-mail application, c ontact your network operator or e-mail ser vice provider. T o receive t he e-mail s ettings as a configuration mes sage, see Conf iguration settings s ervice on page 17 . ⢠To s et the e-mai l settings on your phone, press Menu and select Messages , Message settings and E-mail mes sages . See Settings for e-mail application on page 78 . Writin g and s endi ng an e-mai l You can w rite your e-ma il before connec ting to the e-mail service, or connect to the service first, and then write and send your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Create e-mail . The waiting note is displayed. 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address and press OK or pr ess Edit and ke y in the e-mail a ddress, and press OK .
Menu func t ions 71 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To s earch for th e e-mail addres s in Contacts , press O ptions , and select Search . 3. You can k ey in a s ubject for t he e-mail if y ou want, and press OK . If you press Options , you can s elect one of the following: the message e ditor, add a ne w recipient, add a copy recipie nt or add a hidden copy rec ipient. 4. Key in the e-mail message, see Writing text on pa ge 38 . The number of charact ers that you can key in is shown o n the top right of the display. 5. To s end the e-mail, pr ess Send . Select ⢠Send now to initiate the sending ins tantly. If you have not a lready connected t o the e -mail account, your phone es tablishes the connec tion first a nd then sends the e -mail. ⢠Send later to send your e-mail lat er. The e- mail is saved in the Outbox folder. If you want to edit or continue writing your e-mail later, you can save it in Draf ts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Menu and select M essa ges and E-mail , press Option s and sele ct Send now or Retrieve and send . After sending the e-mail, the phone asks if you want to dis connect from the e - mail se rvice. Press Ye s to disc onnect or No to leave the connection open. Note : When sending e-mails , your pho ne may displa y the words Message sent . This is an in dicatio n that th e e-mail h as been sent by your phon e to the e-mail server. This is not an indica tion that the e-ma il has been r eceived at the intend ed destin ation. Fo r more details about e-mail s ervic es, check with your service prov ider.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 72 Do wnlo ad ing e-m ail s fro m you r e- mail acc oun t 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail and Re tr iev e to download e-mails that hav e been sent to y our e-mail account. Or: Press Menu and s elect Messages and E-mail , press Options and select Re tri eve and send to download new e-mails a nd to send e-ma ils that have been saved in the Ou tbox folder. If the message memory is f ull, delete some of your older messages before you start to download new messages. 2. Your p hone makes a connect ion to the e-mail service. A s tatus bar is shown while yo ur phone is downloading e-mails to your phone. After the download, the phone a sks if y ou want to dis connect from t he e-mail service . Press Ye s to disconnec t or No to leave t he connect ion open. 3. Press Selec t to view th e ne w mess ag e in the Inbox , or press Back to v i e w i t later. If more than one messag e is receiv ed, select t he message t hat you w ant to read. An unr ead text me ssage is indicated by . Reading and r eplyi ng to an e-ma il Imp ortan t: E-mail s may contain viruse s or otherwise be harmful to your device o r PC. Do not open any a ttachme nt if you are no t sure of the tru stworth iness of the sender. 1. Press Menu , select Messages , E-mail and Inbox . 2. While reading the message , press Options .
Menu func t ions 73 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. You can, for example, view the details of t he selected message, mark the message as unread, delet e it, reply to it, reply to all, for ward it or mov e the message t o another folder. If the message does not f it in the first page, pr ess Next pg. to view the next page of t he message. 3. To reply to an e- mail, press Reply . Sele ct Original text t o include the or iginal message in the reply or select E mpty screen . When replying to an e-mail, f irst confirm or edit the e-mail address and subject, then write your reply. 4. To s end the message, pres s Sen d and select Send no w . To s end the message lat er, press Se nd later . The message is moved to t he Outbox folder. After sending the message, t he phone asks if you want to disconnect fr om the e-mail ser vice. Pres s Ye s to dis connect or No to leave t he connect ion open. Inbox and Othe r fo lders (Dr afts, Arc hive, Outb ox an d Sent it ems ) Your phone has the following folders in the E-mail menu: ⢠Inbox for s aving e-mails that you have downloaded f rom your e-mail account. ⢠Other folders contains the f olders: Dr af ts f or saving unfinished e-ma ils, Archive for organising and saving your e- mails, Outbox for s aving e-mails that have not been sent, if you have s elected Send later , see Writing and sending an e-mail on page 70 , and Sent i tems for saving e- mails that hav e been sent.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 74 De let ing e-ma ils To delete e- mails, press Men u and selec t Messages and E-mail , pr ess Options and sel ect Delete messages . To dele te all message s from a fol der, select t he folder from whic h you want to delete t he messages and press Ye s . To delet e all mes sages from all folders, select All messages and press Yes . Note that deleting an e-mail f rom your phone does not delete it from the e-mail serve r. Voice messag es The v oice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it. For more information and for the voice mailbox n umber, contact your service provider. Press Menu , and select Messages and V oice messages . Select ⢠Listen t o voice mes sages to call your voic e mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in the V oice mailbox number menu. If you have two phone lines available (network service), each pho ne line may have it s own voice ma ilbox number. Refer to Call settings on page 105 . ⢠Voice mailbox number to key in, search f or or e dit your voice mailbox number and pr ess OK to save it. If suppor ted by the network, the indic ator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your v oice mailbox number .
Menu func t ions 75 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Tip: Pressing a nd holding calls your voice mailbox if you have t he number set. Info messages With t he info message network s ervice you ma y be able t o receive messages on various topics from your s ervice pr ovider. These messages may include, fo r example, weather or t raffic condit ions. For ava ilability, topics and t he rel evant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Ser vic e c omm a nds Press Menu , and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and sen d serv ic e requests (also k nown as U SSD commands), such as activation c ommands for network services, to your service provider. Delet ing a ll me ssag es from a fo lder To dele te all message s from a fol der, press Menu , and select Messages and De lete messages . To dele te all message s from a fol der, select t he folder from whic h you want to delete t he messages and press OK to confirm the query. If the folder contains unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete t hem also.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 76 Messag e s etti ngs The mes sage settings affect the se nding, receiv ing and viewing of messages. Se ttin gs fo r text an d SMS e- ma il mess age s Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings and Text messages . Sending profile Select Sending profile . If more than one me ssage profile s et is supported by your SIM card, select the s et that you want to change. â¢S e l e c t Message centre number to save the phone nu mber of the message centre that is required for sending text mes sages. You will receive this number from y our service provider. â¢S e l e c t Messag es sen t via to select the messa ge type Text , E-mail , P aging or Fax . â¢S e l e c t Message validity t o select t he length of time for wh ich the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For the message type Text , sel ec t Default recipient number to sa ve a defa ult number for sending messages for this profile. Fo r the mes sag e ty pe E-mail , select E- mail server to save th e e-mail ser ver number. â¢S e l e c t Delivery repo rts to ask t he network to s end deliver y reports about your messages (netw ork service). â¢S e l e c t Use GP RS and select Ye s to se t GPRS as the pref erred SMS beare r. Also, set GPRS connection to Alway s online , see (E)GPRS connection on page 111 .
Menu func t ions 77 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â¢S e l e c t Reply via same ce ntre to allow the r ecipient of your me ssage to send you a re pl y via you r me s sag e cen t re (n et w or k s e rv ic e) . â¢S e l e c t Rename sending profile to change th e name of t he selected mes sage profile. The default profile cannot be renamed. The message profile sets are only displayed if your SIM car d supports more t han one set. Save me ssage setting Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings , T ext messages and Save sent messages . Select Yes to set the phone to save sent multimedia messages in t he Sent items folder. If y ou select No , the sent messages are not saved. Setti ngs f or mul t imedia me ssages If Allow multimedia recept ion is se t to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may cha rge you for every mes sage you receiv e. The default set ting to rec eive multimedia mes sages is generally on. Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save s ent messages . Select Yes to set the phone t o save sent mult imedia messages in the Sent items fol der. If you select No , the se nt me ssa ges are not sav ed. ⢠Deliv ery reports to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (netw ork service). ⢠Scale image down to define the image size when you inse rt the image int o the multimedia message. ⢠Default slide timing to defi ne the default time f or slides in multimedia messages.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 78 ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Choose No , Yes or In home network to use the multimedia service. If you choos e In home network , you can not receiv e multimedia messages when outside your home network. If Allo w multimedia reception is set to Ye s or In home network , yo ur operator or service provider may charge you f or every message you r eceive. The default setting to receive mult imedia messages is ge nerally on. ⢠Incoming multimedia mes sages . Select Retrieve to se t th e p hon e t o automatically fetch newl y recei ved multimedia mess ages, or select Reject if you do not w ish to rec eive multimedia mes sages. This setting is not shown if Allow multimedia reception is se t to No . ⢠Configuration settings . Select Configuration and sel ect the def ault service provi der for r etrieving multimedia messages. Select Account to see the account s provided by the service provide r. If more t han one account is displaye d choose the one t hat you want to use. You may r eceive the settings as a configuration message from the network operator or service provider. To receive the settings a s configuration message , see Configuration se ttings servi ce on page 17 . T o key in t he setti ngs manually s ee Configuration settings on page 11 3 . ⢠Allow adverts to choose if you allo w the rece ption of messages defined as advertisement s. This se tting is not shown if Allow multimedia reception is set to No . Setti ngs f or e-mai l a ppl icati on You may receive the e-mail settings a s a configuration message fr om the network opera tor or service provider. For receiving t he settings as a configuration message,
Menu func t ions 79 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. see C onfiguration settings servic e on page 17 . To key in the settings manually s ee Configuration settings on page 11 3 . Select eac h of th e settings individually and key in all the required settings. Contact your network operator or e- mail service provider for the settings. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , and E-mail messages . Select ⢠Configuration and scroll to the set tha t you would like to act ivate and press Select . ⢠Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If more than one account is displayed c hoose the one t hat you want to use. ⢠My name . Key in your name or nic kname. ⢠E-mail addres s . K ey in e-mail address. ⢠Include signature . You can d efine a signat ure that is automat ically added to the end of your e -mail, when you wr ite your me ssage. ⢠Reply-to addr ess . Key in t he e-mail address to whic h you want t he replies to be sent. ⢠SMTP user name . Key in the name that you want to use for out going mails. ⢠SMTP password . Key in the pas sword that y ou want to us e for outgoing mails . ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Yes to pe rform manual user aut hentication for intranet connec tions. ⢠Incoming server type . Select either POP3 or IMAP4 depending on t he type of e- mail system t hat you are using. If both t ypes are supported, select IMAP4 . ⢠Incoming mail s ettings
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 80 If you have se lected POP3 as the inco ming server type, t he following opt ions ar e s h o wn : ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Key in t he maximum number of e-mails that y ou want to retrieve at a time. ⢠POP3 user name . Key in the user name. ⢠POP3 password . Key in t he password. ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Ye s t o perform manual user authenticat ion for intr anet connections. If you have se lected IMAP4 as the incoming serve r type, the following options ar e s h o wn : ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Key in t he maximum number of e-mails that y ou want to retrieve at a time. ⢠Retrieval me thod . Select La tes t if you want t o retrieve all newly re ceived e- mails or select Latest unread if you want to r etrieve only e- mails that y ou have not read. ⢠IMAP4 user name . Key in the user name. ⢠IMAP4 password . K ey in the password. ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Ye s t o perform manual user authenticat ion for intr anet connections. Common setting s Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Othe r se ttings and Font siz e to selec t the font size for reading and w riting messages.
Menu func t ions 81 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Messag e co unt er To vie w how many mess ages you have sent and received, press Menu and select Messages and Message counter . Select Sent messages or Rece ived messages or sel ect Clear counters to clear the coun ters. â Call re gist er The phone registers t he phone numbers of missed, received and dialled calls, and the approximate length of your calls. The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within the networkâ s service ar ea. When you press Options in the Missed calls , Received calls and Dialled numbers menus, you can, for example, vie w the date and the time of the call, e dit or delet e the phone number from the lis t, save the number in Contacts , or send a message to the nu mber . Recent calls lists Press Menu , and select Call register and then select ⢠Missed calls t o view the list of up t o 20 phone n umbers from which somebody has tried t o call you (network service). T he number in front of the (name or) phone number indica tes the amount of call att empts from that caller.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 82 Tip: When a note about missed c alls is displayed, pr ess List to acce ss the list of phone numbers. Scr oll to the number that you would like to call back and press . ⢠Received c alls to view t he list of up to 20 phone numbers from which yo u have most recently accepted or reject ed calls (network service). ⢠Dialled numbers to view the list of up to 20 phone numbers that you have mos t recently call ed or atte mpted to call. Tip: In standby mode, press onc e to access the list of dialled numbers. Scroll t o the number or name that you want, and pres s to call the number. ⢠Delete rec ent call lists to delete the recent calls lists. Se lect whether you want to delete all the phone numbers in the r ecent calls lists, or only those numbers in the miss ed calls, receiv ed calls or dia lled numbers lists. You c annot undo this operation. Coun ters and time rs f or cal ls, d ata a nd m essag es Note : The actual invoice for cal ls and services from your se rvice provider may vary, depend ing up on ne twork fe atu res, rou nding off fo r billing, taxe s and so for th. Press Menu , and select Call register and t hen select ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximate durat ion of your incoming and outgoing calls in hours, minutes and seconds. The security c ode is required to clear t he timers.
Menu func t ions 83 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If you have two phone lines available (n et work service), each phone line has its own call duration timers. T he timers of t he cur rently selecte d line are displaye d. Refer to Call settings on page 10 5 . ⢠GPRS data count er . Scroll to check the amounts of data t hat were sent or received in the las t session, data s ent and receiv ed in total, and to clea r the counters. T he counter unit is a byte. The secu rity code i s required to clear the counters. ⢠GPRS connec tion timer . Scroll to check the approximate duration of the last GPRS connect ion or the tota l GPRS connection t ime. You can also clear t he timers. T he security code is required to clear the timers. â Cont acts You can s ave names and phone numbers (Contacts) in the phoneâÂÂs memor y and in t he SIM cardâÂÂs memory. ⢠The phoneâ s memory may save up to 1000 names with numbers and text notes about eac h name. You ca n also save an image for a certain number of names. T he number of name s that ca n be saved depends on the length of the names, and the number a nd length of the phone number s and text it ems. Contacts use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 . ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 254 names and phone numbers. N ames and numbers sa ved in the SIM cardâÂÂs memory, are indica ted by .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 84 In dynamic contacts you can publish yo ur current availability status to communicate t o anyone who has access to this serv ice and who is requesting th is information. You can vi ew the availabilit y status of any of the cont acts that y ou have s ubscribed to in t he Subscribed names menu and in the detaile d view of a name in Contacts . See My presence on page 89 . Selecting setti ngs f or cont acts Press Menu and select Contacts and Settings . Sele ct ⢠Memory in use to select t he memory, either SIM card or phone, that you want to use f or your contacts. To recall names and number s from bot h memories f or contacts, s elect Phone and SIM . In that case, the names and numbers will be saved in the phoneâÂÂs me mory. ⢠Contacts view to select how the names, numbe rs and images in contacts are displaye d. ⢠Memory status to view how much memory is available in the select ed memory for contacts. Savi ng nam es a nd ph one nu mbe rs (A dd cont act ) Names and numbe rs will be s aved in t he used memory, see Selecting settings for con t act s above. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Add new contact . 2. Key in the name and press OK . See Using traditional text input on page 39 .
Menu func t ions 85 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 3. Key in the phone number, a nd press OK . To key in the numbers, see Making a cal l on page 34 . 4. When the name and number are saved, press Do ne . Tip: Quick save In st andby mode, key in t he phone number and press Save . Key in t he name, press OK and Don e . Saving m ultip le num bers or tex t items per na me You can s ave different t ypes of phone numbers and short t ext items per name in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory for contacts. The fir st number saved is automatica lly set as the default number and it is indicat ed with a frame around the number type indicator, for example . Whe n you se lect a name from cont acts, for e xample to make a cal l, the def ault number is used unless you select another number. 1. Make s ure that the memory in use is eit her Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting s ettings for contacts on page 84 . 2. To ac cess the list of names and ph one numbers, move the joys tick down in standby mode . 3. Scrol l to the name saved in the phone âÂÂs internal memory for t he contact to which y ou want to add a new number or text it em, and press Det ails . 4. Press O ptions and select Add number or Add detail . 5. To add a number or de tail, select one of the number types or t ext types, respe ctiv el y. ⢠If y ou select the text t ype Use r I D :
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 86 Select Search to search for a n ID by a mobile phone number or an e-mail address in the server of the operator or service provider if you have connect ed to the pr esence ser vice. See My presenc e on page 89 . If only one ID is fo und, it is automat ically sa ved. Otherwise, to save th e ID, press Options , and select Save . To key in t he ID, select Enter ID manually . Key in the ID and press OK to sa ve it. To change the number or text type, select C hange type in the options lis t. Note that you cannot change the type of an ID when it is on the IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. To s et the select ed number as the de fault number, select Set as default . 6. Key in the number or text item and press OK to sav e it . 7. Press Back and then Exit to return to sta ndby mode. Addi ng an image t o a nam e or n umber i n contact s You can a dd an image in s upported format to a name or number saved in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory. Move the joys tick do wn in standby mode, scroll to the contact t hat you want to add an image to and press Details . Press Options and select Add image . The phone opens the list of folder s in the Gallery . Scroll to the des ired image, press Options and se lect Save to contacts . A c opy of the ima ge is added to the contact .
Menu func t ions 87 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Sear ching for a con tact 1. Press Menu and select Con t act s and Search , or t o quickly find a contact name, move th e joystick down in standby mode . 2. You can key in the first characters of the name you are searching for in the pop-up window . Move th e joystick up and down to scroll through the na mes in the lis t, and move the joystick left and right t o move the cursor in t he pop-up window. 3. Scroll t o the contact name that you want, and press Details . Press View to see the whole information. Depending on the Con ta ct s vi e w selection in Selecting settings for contacts on page 84 , the subscr ibed names are shown differently. Only the availability indicat or or the availa bility indicator, t he personal logo and the status message are shown. Press Det ails and all of the dynamic infor mation is shown. Tip: Viewing a contact. To quick ly vi ew a specifi c name with the default phone number, pr ess and hold at t he name while scrolling through the c onta ct na mes. To vie w the sta tus message in f ull, press Details and press and hold at the dynamic c ontact while scrolling t hrough the contact names. Deleting co ntact s Press Menu and select Contacts and De le te t o delete contac ts and all the det ails a ttac hed to the m.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 88 ⢠To dele te contact s individually, sele ct One by one and scr oll to the name that you want t o delete. Pr ess De lete and press Ye s to confirm. If the contact has an ID in IM c ontacts or in the Subs cribed names lis t, t he note Presence information will be delet ed is shown before the c ontact is delete d. ⢠To dele te contact s all at once, select Delete all and then s cro ll to eith er of th e Phone or SIM card memories and press De lete . Pres s Yes and confirm with the securit y code. Editin g or deleti ng det ails Search f or the contact that you want to edit or delete and press Details . Scroll to the name, number, te xt item or image that you want t o edit or de lete and press Options . ⢠To edit a name, number or text item or to change image, select Edit name , Edit number , Edit detail or Change image , res p ect i ve ly . Note th at you cannot edit or delete a n ID when it is in IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. ⢠To dele te a number or text item, select Delete number or Delete detail , respect ively. ⢠To dele te an image attached to t he contact, select Delete image. Deleting a n image fr om contacts does not delete it from Gallery .
Menu func t ions 89 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. My presence With t he presence s ervice (n etwork ser vice) you can share your presence status with other users, for example your family, friends and colleagues with compatible devices and acce ss to the s ervice. Pre sence status includes your a vailability, st atus message and personal logo. O ther users who hav e access t o the ser vice and who are r equesting your informat ion are able t o see yo ur status. The r equested information is shown in Subs cribed names in the viewers Cont acts menu. You can personalis e the information that you want to share with ot hers and contr ol who can see y our status. Before y ou can use presence, you need to s ubscribe to t he service. To check the availability, for charging details and to subscribe to t he service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you als o receive your unique I D and pas sword and the settings for the service. T o set the required settings for the presence servic e, see In stant messaging settings on page 69 . While you hav e connected t o the pres ence servic e, you can use the othe r functions of the phone, and t he presence s ervice is active i n the back ground. Press Menu and select Contacts and My presenc e . Select ⢠Connec t to 'My pre sence' serv ice (or Disconnect ) to conne ct to (or to disconnect from) the service . ⢠My current presence to change your presence status. Select ⢠View cur rent presence and select Private pres . or Public pres. to view your current private or public status.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 90 ⢠My availability to set your av ailability sta tus to Av ailable indicated by , or to Busy indicated by , or to N ot available indicated by . ⢠My presence message and key in t he text to be shown to other persons or press Option s and sele ct Previous msgs . and select an old message as t he stat us me ss age. ⢠My presence logo to select y our personal logo f rom the Graphics folder in the gallery. If you s elect the Default , the logo is not publis hed. ⢠Show to to select t he groups to whom you want t o show your pres ence status or if not to s how it at all . Select Private and public and contacts in y our privat e list are able to see all your pr esence information: availabilit y, stat us message and logo. O ther contacts ca n see only your ava ilability. Select Private vie wers and t he contacts in your private list can see all your presence information (availabilit y, status mes sage and logo). Other users will not s ee any informa tion. If you select No on e , no one can see your presence information. ⢠Viewers and select ⢠Curr ent viewers to view all the persons who hav e subscribed to your presence info rmation. ⢠Private list is a list of the pe rsons who are allowed to vie w all your pres ence information, incl uding availa bility, status message and logo. You can manage your own privat e list. Other persons who are not in the pr ivate list, can see only your av ailability.
Menu func t ions 91 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Blocked list to vie w all the persons you have blocked from viewing yo ur presence info rmation. ⢠Settings and select ⢠Show current presence in idle to show the c urrent status indicator in standby mode. ⢠Synchronise w ith profiles to select whether y ou want to update y our My presence message and My availabilit y manually or aut omaticall y by linking them to the currently active profile. Refer also to Profiles on page 99 . Note that you cannot link a personalised status logo to a Profile. ⢠Connection type to se lect if the phone connects automatically t o the service when the phone is switched on. ⢠IM and my presenc e settings , see Instant messaging settings on page 69 . Subscr ibed na mes You can c reate a list of contacts whose presence status information you want to be aware of . You can view the information if t he contacts allow you to vie w it and if it is not prevente d by the contact or net work. You can v iew thes e subscribed names either by scrolling through t he contacts or via the Subscribed names menu. Ensure t hat the memor y in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 84 . To conne ct to the Presence s ervice, press Me nu and select Co nt ac ts , My presence and Connect to 'My pr esence' ser vice . You can view the su bscribed names even
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 92 when you are not connec ted to the presence ser vice but you c annot see the presence status informat ion about the cont act. Adding co ntac ts to t he su bscri bed names 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . If y ou have not connect ed to the Pres ence servic e, the phone asks if you want to connect now. 2. If you have no c ontacts on your list, pres s Add . Otherwise, press Options and sel ect Subscribe new . The list of your contacts is shown. 3. Select a cont act from the list and if t he contact has a u ser ID saved, the contact is added to the subscribed names list. If t here is more t han one ID, select one of them. Aft er subscription of the contact, Subs cription activat ed is show n. Tip: To s ubscribe to a contact f rom Contacts list, move the joystick down in standby mode and scroll to the contact y ou want to s ubscribe to. Press Details and press Options . To subscribe, select Request presence and sele ct As s ubscription . If you only want to view the prese nce information but not to subscribe to a contact, select Request presence and One time only . View ing th e subs cr ibed name s Refer a lso to Searching for a contact on page 87 to view the pres ence information. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . The s tatus information o f the first contact on the s ubscribed names list is displaye d. The information that the per son wants to give to others may incl ude text a nd some of t he following icons:
Menu func t ions 93 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. , or indicate that the pers on is either avai lable, discr eet or not available. indicates that the personâÂÂs presence information is not available. 2. Press D etails to view the details of the se lected contact, or press Op tions and sel ect ⢠Subscribe new t o add a new contact to the list o f subscribed names . ⢠Chat to st art a conv ersa t ion . ⢠Send message to send a text message to the selecte d contact. ⢠Send SMS e-mail to send an e-mail t o the select ed contact. ⢠Send bus. card to se nd a bus iness c ard to the sel ecte d cont act . ⢠Uns ubscribe t o remove the selected contact from the list of subscribed names. Un su bscr ibin g a con ta ct ⢠To uns ubscribe a contact from the Contacts list, move the joys tick down in standby mode and scroll to t he contact that you want t o unsubscribe. Pre ss Details and De tai ls again, select the ID and press Options . To unsubscribe, sel ect Unsubscribe and press Ye s t o confirm. ⢠To uns ubscribe via the Subscr ibed names menu, see Viewing the subscribed names on page 92 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 94 Co pyin g cont acts You can c opy names a nd phone numbers from t he phoneâÂÂs memory to your SIM cardâÂÂs memory and vice versa. Note that any text items saved in t he phoneâÂÂs internal me mory, such as e- mail addresses, w ill not be copied t o the SIM card . 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Copy . 2. Select the cop ying direction, From phone to SIM card or From SIM card to phone . 3. Select One by one , All or Default numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the name that you want to copy and pres s Copy . Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone t o the SIM card. Only the default numbe rs will be copied. 4. To choos e whether you want to keep or delete the or iginal names and numbers, sel ect Keep original or Move original . ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , pr ess Ye s when Copy contacts? or Move contacts? is displayed. Sending and r eceiving a bu sine ss ca rd You can s end and receive a pers onâÂÂs contact informat ion from a compatible dev ice as a b u s in e ss ca rd .
Menu func t ions 95 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. When you have received a busines s card, pr ess Show and Save to save the business c ard in the phoneâ s memory. To disc ard the business car d, press Exit and then Yes . To s end a business card, search f or the name and phone number t hat you wa nt to send from Contacts , press Details and O ptions and select Send bus. car d . Select Via infrared , V ia te xt message (network serv ice ) or Via multimedia (network service ) and D efault number or All details . No pic tures can be s ent if you choose Via text message . Speed dials To assign a number to a speed-dialling k ey, press Menu and select Contacts and Speed dials and scroll t o the speed- dialling key number that you want. Press Assign , or if a number has alr eady been assigned to the k ey, press Options and se lect Change . Press Search , and sele ct first the name and t hen the number that you want to as sign. If the Speed dialling f unction is of f, the phone asks whether you want to a ctivate it. See also Speed dialling in Call settings on page 105 . To mak e a call us ing the speed-dia lling keys, see Speed dialling a phone number on page 35 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 96 Voice dialling You can ma ke a phone c all by say ing a voice tag that has bee n added to a phone number. Any s poken word(s), su ch as a pe r sonâÂÂs name(s), can be a voice tag. You can add up to ten voic e tags. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠Voice tags a re not la nguage-d epend ent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's vo ice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are se nsitive to background noi se. Record voice ta gs and use th em in a quiet environme nt. ⢠Very short na mes are not accepted. Use long name s and avoid similar n ames for differ ent num be rs . Note : Using voice ta gs may be dif ficult in a noisy enviro nment or duri ng an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely sole ly upon voic e diall ing in all circ umstances . Adding and managin g voi ce tags Save or c opy in the phoneâÂÂs memory the cont acts to which you want t o add a voice tag. You can also add voice t ags to th e names in the SIM card, but if you replace y our SIM car d with a new o ne, you first need to de lete th e old voice tags before you can add new ones . Voice tags use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 . 1. In standby mode, move t he joystick down. 2. Scroll to the contact to which you want to add a voice tag and press Details . Scroll t o the phone number you want and pr ess Options . 3. Select Add voice tag .
Menu func t ions 97 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 4. Press Start , and sa y clearl y the word( s) you w ant to rec ord as a v oice tag . Afte r recording, the phone plays the recorded t ag. When the voic e tag has been successfully sav ed, V oic e tag saved is displayed, a beep s ounds and a symbol appears af ter the phone number with a v oice tag. To che ck the voice tags , press Men u and select Contact s and V oice tags . Scroll to the cont act with the vo ice tag that y ou wan t, an d pre ss Select to see the opt ions to li sten to, del ete or change the recorded v oice tag. Makin g a call by us in g a voice tag If the phone is running an applicat ion using the GPRS connection s ending or receiving da ta, first end t his application to mak e a call by using voic e dialling. 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the right selection k ey. A short tone is heard and Speak no w is displayed. 2. Say t he voice tag clearly. The pho ne plays the r ecognised voice tag and th en dials the phone number of t he voice tag after 1.5 se conds. If you ar e using a compatible headset wit h the headset k ey, pre ss and hold the headset k ey to st art the voice dialling. Info numb ers a nd s ervice num bers Your service provider may have included information numbers or service numbers in your SIM ca rd. These menus are only shown if suppor ted by your SIM card.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 98 Press Menu and select Contacts and Info numbers or Service number s . Scroll through a category to an information number, or to a s ervice number, and press to ca ll the number. My numbers The phone numbers assigned t o your SIM card ar e saved in My numbers if this is allowed b y the c ard. To view the number s, pres s Menu and select Contacts and My numbers . Scroll to the desired name or number, and pres s Vie w . Call er gr oups You can arrange the names and phone numbers saved in Contacts into caller groups. Fo r each c aller group, you can set the phone to sound a s pecific ringing tone a nd show a select ed graphic on the display when the phone recognises a call from a phone number in the group, see be low. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a s elected caller group, see Alert f or in Tone settings on page 10 0 . Press Menu and select Contacts and Caller groups and select the desired calle r group. Select ⢠Group name , key in a n ew name for t he caller group and press OK . ⢠Group ringing to ne and select the ringing t one for the group. Default is the ringing tone selected for the currently act ive profile . ⢠Group logo and sel ect On to set the phone t o display the gr oup logo, Off not to display it, or View to view the logo.
Menu func t ions 99 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Group members to add a name to t he caller group, press Add . Scroll t o the name you want to add t o the group and press Add . To remove a name f rom a caller group, scroll to t he name that y ou want to remove, and press Options and select Remove contact . â Sett ings Prof iles Your phone has various setting gr oups, profiles, for w hich you can customise the phone tones f or different events and environments. Initially, personalis e the profiles to your own liking and t hen you only need t o activate a profile to use it. Available profiles are General , Silent , M eeting , Outdoor , My sty le 1 , an d My styl e 2 . Press Menu , and select Settings and Profiles . Scroll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To ac tivate the select ed profile, select Ac tiva te . ⢠To personalise the profile, select P ers onalise . Select t he setting you want to change and make the changes. Fo r th e to ne s ett ing s, see Tone s ettings on page 100 . To rename a profile, s elect Profile name . The General profile cannot be renamed. To cha nge your pres ence status infor mation, select My presence . This menu is available if you have set Synchronise with profiles to On , see My p re se nc e on
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 100 page 89 . Select My availability to change your availability s tatus and My presence message to edit y our status mess age. ⢠To s et the profile t o be active unt il a cert ain time up to 24 hours, select Timed and s et the time fo r the profile setting to e nd. When t he time s et for the profile expires, the previous profile that was not t imed, becomes active. Tip: To change the prof ile quickly in standby mode, pr ess the power key , scroll to t he profile that you want to activa te and press Se lect . Themes A theme is a pac kage that may include a screen saver , a wallpaper image, a ri nging tone and a colour sc heme to customise your phone for dif ferent events and envir onments. Themes are stored in Gallery . Press Menu , and select Settings and Themes . ⢠To ac tivate a theme, select Select theme to view the Themes folder in Gallery . Open the folder and scroll to a theme. Press Options and select Apply t heme . Refer also to Gallery on page 11 7 . ⢠To downloa d new theme s, select Theme downloads . Re fe r to Downloading on page 151 . To ne se t tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings and then Tone s ettings . You ca n find the s ame settings in the Profiles menu, see Pr ofiles on page 99 . N ote th at the sett in gs yo u make w ill change t he settings in the ac tive prof ile.
Menu func t ions 101 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Select Incoming call alert to choose how the phone notif ies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , A scending , Ring once , Beep once and Off . Select Ringing tone for incoming voice calls . To se lect ringing tones from Gallery , sel ect Open gallery from t he ringing tone list. Tip: If you receive a ringing tone via infr ared connection or by downloading, you can save the r inging tone in the Gallery . Select Ringing volume and Vibrat ing alert for incoming voice calls and messages. The v ibrating alert doe s not work when the phone is connec ted to a c harger, a desktop s tand, a car kit, or other like e nhancement. Select Message alert tone t o set the aler t tone for the incoming messages or Instant message aler t tone to set the aler t tone for in sta nt messa ges . Sel ect Keypad tones , o r W arning tones to s et the phone to s ound tones, f or example, when the bat tery is running out of power. Select Alert f or to set t he phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected caller group. Scroll to the c aller group you want to se lect or choose A ll calls and pr ess Ma rk . Person a l s hort cut s With persona l shortcuts you get quick acc ess to frequently us ed phone functions. Right s ele ct ion key You can a llocate one phone function fr om a predefined list to the right selection ke y. R efe r also to Standby mode on page 28 . T his menu is not shown in some operator v ariants.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 102 Press Me nu , and select Settings , P ers onal shortcuts and Right selection key . Select a functi on from the list. T he name of the right sele ction key changes in standby mode according to the function. Go to opti ons You can a llocate phone functions from a predef ined list to t he left s election key. Press Menu , and select Settings and P ersonal shortcuts . Select Sele ct 'Go to' options to choose t he functions that y ou want to appe ar in the s hortcut list. Select Organise 'Go t o' options to r earrange the funct ions on your personal shortcut list. Re fer also to Standby mode on page 28 . Voice co mmands You can have phone functions whic h can be activat ed by saying a voice tag. Up to five f unctions can be selected for voice tag. Press Menu , and select Settings , P ersonal shortcuts and Voice commands . Select the function folder that yo u want and scroll to the function to wh ich you want t o add a v oice tag and press Add . A voice tag is indicated wit h . Refer to the instructions in s ection Adding and managing voice tags on pa ge 96 . To ac tivate a voi ce command, ref er to th e instructions in section Making a call by using a voice tag on page 97 . During a call or when an application us ing the (E)GPRS connect ion is sending or receiving da ta, you cannot activate or a dd a voice command. Displ ay set tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings and Display settings .
Menu func t ions 103 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â¢S e l e c t Wallpaper to set your phone to display a background image, known as wallpaper, w hen the phone is in standby mode. Some images are presaved in the Gallery menu. You can a lso receive images, for example, via multime dia messages, or transfer t hem with PC Suite fr om your PC and t hen save them in Gallery . Your phone suppor ts JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BMP and PNG formats but not neces sarily all variations of these file formats. To s elect the w allpaper, select Select wallpaper and open an image folder. Scroll to th e image that you want to set as wallpape r, press Options and select Set as wallpape r . To ac tivate/deactivate the wallpa per, select On / Off , respectively. Note t hat the wallpape r is not di splayed when the phone activ ates the screen save r. â¢S e l e c t Screen s aver to set your phone to display a screen saver when the phone is in standby mode and none of the phoneâÂÂs functions have been used f or a certain time. Select On to switch t he screen s aver on or Off to switch it of f. Select in Time-out the time after which th e screen saver will be activated. In Other you can set the length of t he timeout from 5 seconds t o 10 minutes (minutes:seconds). With Select s. saver y ou can choose an animation or a still image as the screen saver from Gallery . Press any key to deactivat e the s creen saver. The screen saver is also deact ivated when t he phone is out of the network cove rage area.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 104 Independent of the screen s aver set tings, for power s aving purposes, a digital clock view will be activated w hen no phone f unction has been us ed for a certain time. See Pow e r s a v i n g on page 30 . Note that the screen saver overrides all the graphics and texts on t he display in standby mode . â¢S e l e c t Colour schemes to change the colour in some display components, for example i ndicators and signal and battery bars, and the bac kground image that appea rs when using a menu function. â¢S e l e c t Menu view to set the way the phone displays the main menu. S elect Li st for the me nu list view and Gr id for the me nu grid vie w. â¢S e l e c t Operator logo to set your phone to display or hide the operat or logo. If you have not saved the ope rator logo, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. The operator logo is not di splayed when the phone activ ates the screen saver. For mor e information on t he availability of an operator lo go, contact y our network operator or service provider. See also PC Su ite on page 158 . Time an d dat e set ti ngs Press Menu , and select Settings and Time and date settings . â¢S e l e c t Clock and Show clock (or Hide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Selec t Set t he time to adjust the clock to the correct time, Time zone to set the ti me zo ne, and Time format to se lec t the 12-hour or 24-hour time format.
Menu func t ions 105 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The c lock serves the funct ions Messag es , Call register, Alarm cloc k , timed Profiles , Calendar , No tes and Screen saver , for example. If the battery i s removed from t he phone or if the battery is empty, you may ne ed to s et the ti me aga in. â¢S e l e c t Date and Sho w date (or Hide date ) and t he date is shown (or hidden) on the display when the phone is in sta ndby mode. Selec t Set the date to adjust the date. You can als o select th e date format and date sepa rator. â¢S e l e c t Aut o-update of date & time (network servic e) and On to set the pho ne to automatically update the time and date ac cording to the current time zone. To set t he phone to re quest for a c onfirmation before th e update, s elect Confirm first . The automatic update of the date and time does not change the t ime that you have s et for the alarm clock, cal endar or the alarm notes. They are in local t ime. Updating may cause some ala rms that you have set to expire. For information on availability, contact your network operator or service provi der. Call s ett ings Press Menu , and select Settings and Call settings . Select ⢠Automatic volume control and the phone will automatically adjus t the speaker volume ac cording to the bac kground noise. ⢠Call divert (network service). W ith call divert, you can direct your incoming calls to another number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 106 details, contact your service provide r. Divert options not s upported by your SIM card or your network operator may not be shown. Select the divert option y ou want, fo r example, select Divert if busy to diver t voice calls when y our number is busy or when you rejec t an incoming call. To set the diver t se ttin g to on, selec t A c tiva te and then s elect the timeout after which t he call is dive rted, if this is avai lable for the div ert option. To set the divert s etting to off, select Cance l , or select Check status , if this is available for the divert option, to check whether call divert is activated or n ot. Several divert options may be activ e at the s ame time. To s ee the diver t indicators in standby mode, s ee Standby mode on page 28 . Call barring and call dive rting cannot be active at the same t ime. ⢠Anykey answer and On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any ke y, e xcept , selection keys and , and . ⢠Automatic redial and On and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to co nnect the ca ll after an uns uccessful c all attempt. ⢠Speed dialling and On and the names and phone numbers assigned to the speed-dialling key s, from t o , can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key. ⢠Call waiting and A cti va te and the networ k will notify you of an incoming call while yo u have a call in progr ess (network ser vice). See Call wait ing on page 36 . ⢠Summary after call and On and the phone will br iefly display t he approximate duration and cost (network service) of the ca ll aft er each call.
Menu func t ions 107 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Send my cal ler ID and Yes and your phone number will be displayed to t he person you are ca lling (network service). Select Set by net work a nd t he se tting agreed upon w ith your servi ce provider is us ed. ⢠Line for outgoing calls which is a network service, to sele ct phone line 1 or 2, that is , the su bscriber number, for making c alls. For ex ample, you ca n have a private and a business line. For more inf ormation on availa bility, contact y our network operator or service provider. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribe d to this network service, y ou will not be able to make calls. H owever, calls on both lines ca n be a nswered regardless of the selected line. If suppor ted by your SIM car d, you ca n prevent t he line select ion by selecting the option Lock . Tip: In standby mod e and i f you have two lines available, you can switch fr om one line to t he other by pressing and holding . Ph one s et tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone set tings . Select ⢠Phone language to set t he display langua ge of your phone. If you sele ct Automatic the phone sele cts the language ac cording to t he informatio n on the SIM card. ⢠Automatic key guard to set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a pre-set time delay when the phone is in s tandby mode and no phone
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 108 function has been used. Sele ct On and you can set t he time from 5 seconds to 60 minutes. Refer also to Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32 . When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to t he official emergency number. Key in the emergency number and press . ⢠Cell inf o display and On to receiv e information from the network depending on the network cell used (network service). ⢠Welcome note and key in the note you would lik e to be shown briefly when the phone is switched on. T o save the note, press Save . ⢠Operat or se lection and Automatic and t he phone aut omatically selects one of the cellular networks available in your area. If you select Manual , you can select a net work that has a roaming agr eement with your home network operator. If No network acces s is displaye d, you must select another network. The phone stays in manual mode unt il the automatic mode is selected or anot her SIM card is inserted into th e phone. ⢠Confirm SIM service actions . See SIM services on page 156 . ⢠Help text activation to set the phone t o show or not to show t he help t exts. See als o Using the menu on page 42 . ⢠Start-up tone to set the phone to play or not to play a start-up tone when the phone is switched on.
Menu func t ions 109 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Connecti vity You can c onnect the phone to a compa tible devic e via an infrar ed connection or you can also define t he settings for (E)GPRS dial-up connections. Infra red You can s et up the phone to receive data through its infrared (IR) por t. To use an IR connection, t he device with which you want to establish a c onnection must be IrDA compliant . You can send or receive data such as business cards, graphics, images, sound clips, videos and calendar notes to or f rom a compatible phone or data device (for example, a computer) v ia the IR port of your pho ne. Do not poi nt the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye o r allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device i s a Class 1 Laser pro duct. Sending and receiving data via IR ⢠Ensure t hat the IR port s of the sending and receiving devic es are point ing at each other and that t here are no obstructions between the de vices. Th e preferable distance bet ween the two devices in an infrared connection is one meter at most. ⢠To activate the IR port of your phone to r eceive data via IR, press Me nu , and sel ect Settings , Connectivity and Infr ared . ⢠The us er of the t ransmitting phone select s the des ired IR function to star t the da ta tr ans fe r. If data transfer is not s tarted within 2minutes after the act ivation o f the IR port, the connection is canc elled and has to be started a gain.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 110 IR connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, t he IR c onnection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data via its IR por t. ⢠When blinks, your ph one is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. (E)GPRS GPRS (General Pac ket Radio Se rvice) is a netw ork service that allows mobile phones to be used for sending and receiving data ov er an Internet Protocol (IP)- based network. GPRS is a dat a bearer that enables wireless acces s to data networks such as the In ternet . EGPRS (Enhanced G PRS), also known as EDGE (Enhanced Dat a Rates for Global Evolution), is similar to GPRS. EDGE is a radio interface modulation t echnique which inc reases GRPS dat a rates. For mor e information on t he availability of EGPRS and data transfer spe ed, contact your network operat or or service provider. The applic ations that may use (E)GPRS are MMS, Instant messaging, brow sing sessions, e- mail, remote Sy ncML, Java applica tion downloading and the PC dial- up (for example, Internet and e-mail). Before you can use (E)GPRS technology: ⢠Contact your network oper ator or servic e provider for availability of and subscription to t he (E)GPRS s ervice. ⢠Save t he (E)GPRS settings f or each of the applications used over (E)GPRS. For inf ormation on pricing, c ontact your networ k operator or s ervice provider .
Menu func t ions 111 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Note t hat when yo u have select ed GPRS as a data bear er, the phone uses EGPRS instead of G PRS if this is available in the network. You cannot select between EGPRS and GPRS but for some a pplications you may be ab le to select eit her GPRS or G SM data (CSD, Circuit Switched Data). (E)GPRS c onnecti on Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS connection . â¢S e l e c t Always online to set the phone to automatically register t o a (E)GPRS network when you switch the phone on. When the (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. When you start an a pplication using (E)GPRS, the connection betw een phone and net work is estab lished, the indicat or is shown and dat a transfer is possible. W hen you end the a pplication, th e (E)GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the (E)GPRS network remains. If you r eceive a call or a t ext message, or make a c all during a (E)GPRS connection, t he indicator w ill be shown on the top right of the displa y to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is suspended (on hold). Note t hat GPRS and EGPRS ar e not indicated separately, the indic ators for GPRS and EGPRS are the s ame. â¢S e l e c t When needed and t he (E)GPRS registration and c onnection are established when an application using (E)GPRS needs it and closed when you end t he application.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 112 (E )GP RS m ode m set t ing s You can c onnect the phone via infrar ed or a data cabl e connec tion to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem to enable (E)G PRS connectivity from the PC. To define the settings for (E)G PRS connections fr om your PC, press Me nu , and sel ect Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and G PRS modem sett ings . â¢S e l e c t Active access point and activat e the a ccess point that you want to use. â¢S e l e c t Edit active access point t o change the ac cess p oint settings. â¢S e l e c t Alias for access point . Key in the name that you would like for the activat ed access point and press OK . â¢S e l e c t GPRS access point . Key in the Acc ess Point Name (APN) to establish a connection t o an (E)GPRS networ k and press OK . Contact your network operator or service pr ovider for t he APN. You can als o set the (E)GPRS dial- up service settings (Access Point N ame) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options sof tware, see PC Suite on page 158 . If you have s et the settings both on your PC and on your phone, note that the PCâÂÂs settings will be used. En ha ncem ent s et tin gs The enhanc ement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected t o a compat ible mobile enhance ment, chargers and handsfree units, for ex ample.
Menu func t ions 113 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Menu , and select Settings and Enhancement settings . You can select an enhancement menu if the corresponding e nhancement is or has been connec ted to the phone. Depending on the enhance ment, you can s elect some of t he following opt ions: ⢠Default pr ofile to select the prof ile that you w ant to be aut omatically activated when you connect t o the selected enha ncement. You can s elect another prof ile while the e nhancement is connected. ⢠Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming ca ll automatically after 5 seconds. If the Incoming call alert i s s et to Beep once or Off , aut omatic answer w ill not be in use . ⢠Lights to set the light s permanently On . Select Automatic to set t he lights on for 15 second s after a keypress . ⢠When the phone is co nnected t o the full car kit, select Ignition detector and On to a utomatically switch of f the phone ap proximately 20 seconds af ter you have s witched off the c arâÂÂs ignition. Config uratio n setting s Some of the network services, such as mobile Inter net services, MMS, Inst ant messages, E-Mail messages , or Synchronisation need to have t he corre ct configuration setti ngs on your phone. Get the settings from a s ervice provider as a configuration mes sage or ke y in your personal settings manually. Configuration settings fr om up to ten di fferent service pr oviders c an be stored in t he phone and can be managed within this menu.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 114 To s ave the conf iguration settings rece ived by a c onfiguration messa ge sent by a service provider, see Configuration se ttings service on page 17 . The s ettings can be v iewed and par tly edited a lso in the different a pplications. Press Menu , and select Settings , Conf iguration settings . Select ⢠Default conf iguration settings. to view the lis t of service pr oviders stored on the phone (the default s ervice provider is highlighted) and to s elect another service provider as default. Scroll to a provider and press Details to view the lis t with supported applications. T o delete a se rvice provid er from the list, press Options and select De le te . ⢠Activate default in all applications to set the applic ations to use t he settings from the de fault service provider. ⢠Preferr ed access point to select another acc ess point. No rmally the ac cess point from y our preferred ne twork operator is to be used. Keying in the settings manually To enter , view and edit the s ettings manually, press Me nu , and select Set tings , Configuration settings and Pers onal configuration settings . To add a new configuration, press Ad d new or press Options and select Add new . Choose one of the applica tion types from the lis t and k ey in all the ne cessary sett ing s. To acti vat e t he se tting s, pr ess Back and O ptions and select A c tiva te . To view or to edit the user -defined settings selec t the applicat ion that you want to view a nd select t he setting to e dit.
Menu func t ions 115 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Sec urity sett ing s When security features that restrict cal ls are in use (such as call ba rring, clos ed user group and fixed dia lling) calls still may be possib le to the o fficia l emergency n umber pro grammed into your device. Press Menu , and select Settings and Security settings . Sele ct ⢠PIN code request to set the phone to request your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. Some SIM cards do not allo w the PIN code request t o be turned off. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to r estrict incoming ca lls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required. Call barring and call dive rting cannot be active at the same t ime. ⢠Fixed dialling to restri ct your outgoing calls and text messages to s elected phone numbers if this f unction is supported by your SIM card. The PIN2 c ode is required. When the fixed dialling is on, (E)GPRS connections are not possible except while s ending text message s over an (E)GPRS connec tion. In this case, the recipientâÂÂs p hone number and the message cent re number have to be included on the f ixed dialling lis t. ⢠Closed user group . Closed user gr oup is a net work service that specifies the group of p eople whom you ca n call and who c an call you. F or more information contact your network ope rator or service provider. ⢠Secur ity level . Select Phone and the phone will request th e security cod e whenever a new SIM card is ins erted into the phone.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 116 Select Memory and the phone will reques t the security code when the SIM cardâÂÂs memory is se lected and you w ant to change t he memory in us e (see Selecting s ettings for contacts on page 84 ) or copy from one memory to another ( Copying contacts on page 94 ). ⢠Access code s to change t he security co de, PIN code, PIN2 code or barring password . Codes can only include numbers f rom 0 t o 9. Restor e f act ory se tting s To reset some of the menu settings to their original values, press Menu , and select Settings and Restore factory s ettings . Key in the s ecurity code and pr ess OK . Note that t he data that you have keyed in or dow nloaded, for ex ample, the names and phone numbers saved in contac ts are not de leted. â Operator menu This menu lets you ac cess a portal to services provided by your net work operator. This me nu is operator specif ic. The name and the icon depend on the operator . For more informat ion, contact your network ope rator. The operat or can update this menu wit h a service message. For mor e information, refer to Service inbox on page 15 1 .
Menu func t ions 117 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Galle ry In this menu, you can manage graphics, images , video cli ps, recordings and tones that you have saved, for example , from multimedia messages. Th ese files are arranged in folders . Your phone support s a Digital Rights Manageme nt (DRM) system to protect acquired conte nt. A piece of content, for example a ringing tone, can be protected and associat ed with certain usage rules, for example number of usage times and a certain usage period. T he rules ar e defined in t he contentâÂÂs activation ke y which can be delivered either together with the content or independently depending on the service provider. You may be able t o update these activation keys. Always check t he delivery t erms of any content and ac tivation key bef ore acqui ring them, as th ey may be subject to a fee. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ring ing t ones , and o ther conten t from bei ng c o pi ed , mo di fie d, tr ans f err ed or f o rwa rd ed. If your phone displays a message that the memory is full, delet e some of the files in Gall ery before continuing. 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . A list of folders is shown. Images , Video clips , Themes , Graphics , T ones and Recordings a re the original f olders on the phone. 2. Scroll to the desired folder and press Open t o view a lis t of files in the folder or press Option s and one of the options may be av ailable: ⢠Downloads to download more image s, tones and videos. Sele ct Graphic downloads , Tone downloads , Video do wnloads or Theme downloads . The list of available browser bookmark s is shown. Sele ct M ore bookmarks to acce ss the list of bookmarks in the Services menu, se e Bookmarks on page 150 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 118 Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired site. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page f rom the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, ent er the Services menu a nd activate a nother set of service settings, see Mak in g a connection t o a servic e on page 146 . Try reconnecting to the site. For availa bility of differe nt services, pricing and t ariffs, contac t your network operator and/or the service provider. Download content only from the sources you t rust. ⢠Delete folder , Move, Rename folder , Details , Typ e o f v i e w , Sor t , A dd folder and A ctivation key list . You cannot delete, rename or move the original folders on t he phone. ⢠Memory status to view t he status of the second s hared memory of the phone. See Shared memory, 14. 3. If you have opened a folder, select the file that you want t o view a nd press Open . I f Themes was s elected be fore, scroll to a theme and press View to open the theme package. Select and open a file, or pres s Options and use one of the following funct ions that may be available for the selected file: ⢠Delete , Send , Edit image , Move , Rename , Set as wallpaper , Set as ring tone , Apply theme , Details , Type of view , Sort , De lete all , Open in sequence , Mute audio ( Unmute audio ), Set contrast , Add folder and Memory s tatus . ⢠Send to send t he selected file via MMS or IR c onnection. ⢠Delete all to delet e all t he files and folder s in the s elected folder.
Menu func t ions 119 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Edit image to inse rt text, a frame or clip- art into the selected pict ure or to crop the image. ⢠Open in sequence to view the files in the folder individually. ⢠Mute audio ( Unmute audio ) t o mute (unmute) the sound file. ⢠Set contrast to adjust t he contrast le vel of the image. ⢠Activate content to update the activation ke y of t he selected file. Th e option i s only shown if t he activation key of the file can be upda ted. ⢠Activation key lis t to view the list of all available activation keys. You can delete the activa tion keys, f or exa mple delete the expired one s. â Medi a Camera You can t ake photos or record video clips with t he phoneâÂÂs built-in camera. The camera lens is on the back of the phone, a nd the display of the phone wor ks as a viewfinder . The ca mera produces pictures in JPE G format and the video clips in 3GP format. If there i s not enough memory to take a new photo, you need t o free some by deleting old photos or ot her files in the gallery. The Nokia 7260 d evice su pports a n image c apture resol ution of 640 x 480 p ixels. Th e image resolution in these materials may appear different.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 120 Taking a photo or a vid eo cli p Press Menu , and select Media , Camera . The live image appears on the display, and you can us e the display as a viewfinder . Move the joyst ick to the le ft or to the r ight to change t he camera mode: Standard photo , Por trait photo or Vi de o , or if the lighting is dim f or taking photos to Night mode . If you want to add the photo to a name or a phone number s aved in contact s, select P ort rait photo . Tip: To quickly open the camera viewf inder, move t he joystick up in standby mode. ⢠To t ake a photo, pr ess Capture . A shutter sound is heard. T he phone saves the photo in the Images folder of the G allery menu. If You want to send t he photo as a multimedia message, press Send , or s elect Back t o take anothe r photo, or press Options and select, for example, an option to zoom or rename the sav ed photo or send it as a multime dia message, to se t the co ntrast, to see the details, or to set the photo as wallpaper, or to open the gallery, or to delete it . Or if y ou want to delet e the photo, press Del ete . Tip: You can ac tivate the se lf-timer of the camera for one picture at a time. Put th e camera in photo mode, pres s Options and select Self- timer . Press Start , and af ter the t imeout, the came ra takes the photo. While the s elf-timer is running, a beeping s ound is heard. â¢To start recording a video clip, press Record . When you are recording a video c lip, the remaining recording time is show n on the top of the display .
Menu func t ions 121 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To paus e the reco rding, press Pa u s e and to resume the recording, press Continue . To stop the rec ording, press Stop . The phone saves the rec ording in the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. To view the r ecorded video c lip, press Play . Select Back to start recording a new v ideo clip, or pres s Options and select, for example, an option to dele te or rename t he saved video clip, t o set the contrast, or to see t he details, t o send it as a multimedia mes sage, or to open the gallery, or to mute/unmute the microphone. Camera se tting s Press Menu , and select Media , Camera . Pres s Options and depending on t he active c amera mode the following options may appear : ⢠Change mode to change the came ra mode. ⢠Self-timer to ac tiva te the se lf-ti mer. ⢠Mute/ Unmut e to mute or unmut e the microphone in the video mode. ⢠Open galle ry to ope n the Gallery menu. ⢠Settings to adjust th e camera settings : ⢠Default mode to define the default camer a mode. ⢠Image quality to define how much the photo file will be compressed when saving the image. Select High , N ormal or Basic . High provides the bes t image qualit y but uses more memory. ⢠Video clip lengt h to select the length of the video clips that you r ecord. The maximum length of a video clip is a pproximat ely 50 seconds in duration,
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 122 depending on conditions. Only video c lips that are of def ault length or shorter can be sent in a multimedia me ssage. ⢠Camera sounds to se t the sh ut ter soun d an d the self- time r tone to On or Off . ⢠Default t itl e to def ine the title t hat will be used when saving a photo or a video c lip. If you sele ct Aut omatic , the default title will be used, or if you sel ect My ti tl e , you can key in or edit a new ti tle. Radio The FM radio uses th e wire of the hea dset as an ante nna. A compatible h eadset need s to be att ached to the devic e for t he FM ra dio to funct ion pr operly . Warn ing : Lis ten to mus ic at a modera te level. Contin uous expos ure to high volume may damage your heari ng. Warn ing : Do not hold the de vice near your ear w hen the lo udspeaker i s in use, becaus e the volu me may be ex tremel y loud. To listen to the radio on y our phone c onnect the compatible headset to the headset c onnector on the bot tom of the phone. The lead of the he adset functions as the radio antenna, s o let it hang freely. Note t hat the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the radio s tationâÂÂs coverage in that particular area. 1. To turn on the radio, press Men u and select Media and Radio . O n the display ar e
Menu func t ions 123 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Channel location number a nd the name of the radio channe l if you have saved the chann el. ⢠Fre quency of t he radio channel. 2. If you have alr eady saved r adio channels, you can s croll to the channel t hat you would like to listen to, or select a radio channel lo cation 1 to 9 by pres sing the corresponding number key. When using the compati ble headset supplie d with the hea dset key, pr ess the key to scroll to the desired save d radio channe l. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and select Switch off to turn of f the radio. Tip: To quick ly turn of f the radio, pres s and hold . Tuning a r adio ch anne l When the radio is on, pr ess and hold t he joystick up or down to start the channel search. Searching stops w hen a ch annel is found. T o save the channel, press Options , and select Save c hannel . Key in the name of the ch annel and press OK . Select the location where yo u want to s ave the channel. Tip: To quick ly save the channel in a location 1 t o 9, press and hold the corresponding number key, then k ey in t he name of the channel and pr ess OK . Using th e ra dio When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn of f the radio.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 124 ⢠Save channel to save t he radio channel y ou have f ound, refer to Tuning a radio channel above. Up t o 20 radio channels can be s aved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Briefly move the joyst ick up or down t o start t he channel sear ch upwa rds or down wards. Th e search st ops when a channel ha s been found, press OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Briefly move the joystick up or down move t he channel search 0.1 MHz upwards or dow nwards or press and hold down th e keys to quickly search upw ards or downwar ds for a channel. T o save th e channel, pres s OK and see Save channel above. Tip: To quick ly select Manual tuning , pres s when in the Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know the frequency of the radio channel that y ou would like to lis ten to (between 87. 5 and 108.0 MHz), key it in and pre ss OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. Tip: To quick ly select Set frequency , pres s when in the Radio menu. ⢠Delete c hannel . To delete a s aved channel, s croll to it, press De le te , and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name f or the saved c hannel and press OK. ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) t o listen to the r adio using the loudspeaker (or headset). Ke ep the heads et connected to the phone. The lead of t he headset functions as the radio antenna.
Menu func t ions 125 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Mono output (or Stereo output ) to listen to the radio in mono (or in stereo). You can normally make a c all or answer an incoming c all while listening to the radio. During the call, the volume of the radio is muted. When you end the call, the radio volume will automat ically be tur ned up again. When you use the ca mera while listening to the radio, the radio is switched off. After you ha ve finished t he camera application, the radio will be s witched on again, aut omatically. When an application using an (E)GPRS or a HSCSD c onnection is sending or receiving da ta, it may interfere with th e radio. Voic e re co rd e r You can record pieces of speech, sound or an active call for up to 5 minut es. For example, this is useful when recording a name and phone number for writ ing down lat er. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Recordi ng 1. Press Menu , select Media and V oice recorder . 2. To s tart the recor ding, select Record . To start t he recording during a call, pr ess Options , and select Record . While recording a call, all parties to t he call will hear a faint beeping sound every 5 seconds approximately. When recording a call, hold the phone in the normal pos ition near to your ear. 3. To end the recording, press Stop . The recording will be sav ed in the Recordings folder of the G allery menu.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 126 4. To lis ten to the lat est recording, sele ct Play last recorded . 5. To s end to the lates t recording, s elect Send last recorded . The recording can be s e n t v i a I R o r M M S . List of re cordi ngs Press Menu , and select Media , Voice rec ord e r and Recordings list . The list of folders in t he Gallery is shown. O pen Recordings to see t he list with recordings. Press Option s and you c an select s ome of the options for files i n the Gallery . Se e Gallery on page 11 7 . â Organi ser Ala rm c lo ck The alarm clock uses the time for mat set for the clock . The alarm c lock works even when t he phone is switched off i f there is e nough power in the battery. Press Menu , and select Organiser and Alar m clock . â¢S e l e c t Alarm time , ke y in the alarm time and press OK . To cha nge the alarm t ime, sele ct On . â¢S e l e c t Repeat alarm to s et the phone t o alert y ou on selected days of the week. â¢S e l e c t Alarm tone and select the defa ult alarm tone, per sonalise the alarm tone by selecting one from the ri nging tone list or from Gallery, or set a radio channel as the alarm tone.
Menu func t ions 127 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If you s elect the r adio as a n alarm tone, connect the hea dset to t he phone. The phone uses t he most recent ly listened-to c hannel as an alarm tone via the loudspeak er. If the heads et is removed, the default alarm tone w ill be used instead of t he radio. W hen th e ala r m t ime exp ires The phone will sound an alert tone, and f lash Alarm! and t he current t ime on the display. Press St op to stop th e al arm. If you l et the phon e con tinu e to so und th e al arm fo r a minute or pr ess S nooze , the alarm stops for about 10 minutes and then res umes. If the alarm tim e is re ached while the device is switche d off, the device switc hes its elf on and s tart s s oundi ng t he al arm t on e. If y ou p res s Stop , the de vice asks whether yo u want to activate the device for calls . Press No to switch off the device o r Yes to make and receive call s. Do n ot p res s Ye s when wire less p hone use may cause in terfe renc e or danger . Calenda r The c alendar helps you to keep track of r eminders, calls t hat you ne ed to make, meetings, a nd birthdays. The c alendar uses shar ed memory, se e Shared memory on page 14 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and Calendar . Tip: To quickly open the Calendar menu, move the joystick to t he right in standby mode.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 128 Scroll t o the da y that you want. The current da y is indic ated by a frame around the day. If there a re any notes set for the day, the day is in bold type. To view th e day notes, press View . To vie w a week, press O ptions and select Week view . ⢠To vie w a single note, scroll to t he note that you w ant to view, press Vie w . The note view allows you t o view th e details of t he selecte d note. You can s croll through the note. ⢠For example, ther e are also opt ions for cr eating a note, or for sending a note via IR or a s a note directly to a nother compatibl e phoneâÂÂs ca lendar or as a t ext message or a multimedia mes sage. There ar e options for deleting, editing, moving and repeat ing a note and f or copying a note to another day. To dele te all notes in the calendar , select th e month or w eek view, press and sel ect Delete all notes . Settings to s et the date, time, date or time format, or the first day of the week. In the Auto-delete option you can set th e phone to delet e old notes automatically after a s pecified time. However, t he repeat notes, for e xample, birthday notes, will not be deleted. Makin g a calen dar note For key ing in letter s and numbers, see W riting text on page 38 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and Calendar . Scroll to the date you want, press Options and select Ma k e a n ot e . Se lect one of the following not e types: ⢠Meeting - Ke y in the note (o r pre ss O ptions and search f or the name in contacts) and press Save . Key in the location for the mee ting and press Save .
Menu func t ions 129 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Enter the start date and time, then enter the end date and end time for the meeting. To set the alarm f or the note, select Wit h tone or Silent (no alarm tone) a nd then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, press Sav e . Key in t he name, pres s Sa ve . (Instead of ke ying in the phone number, press Options to se arch for the nam e and number in contacts.) T hen enter the t ime for th e call. T o set the alar m for the note, select Wi th tone or Silent (no alarm t one) and then set t he alarm time. ⢠B irthday - Key in the pers onâÂÂs name (or pres s O ptions and search for it in con t act s) , p re ss Save . Then key in the year of birth, and press OK . To set the a larm for th e n ote , sel ect Wi th ton e or Silent (no alarm tone) a nd then set the alarm time. ⢠Me mo - Ke y in the note , press Save . Ente r the st art a nd end d ate fo r the note. To set th e alarm for t he note, select Wi th tone or Si lent (no alarm t one) and t hen set the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in t he subject for the reminder, press Save . To set the alar m for t he note, sele ct Alarm on and then set the ala rm tim e. When you have set the alarm, t he indicator is dis played when y ou view t he notes. W hen th e ph on e s oun ds an a l arm for a not e The phone beeps, and displays the note. With a call note on the display, you can ca ll the displayed number by pres sing . ⢠To s top the alar m without view ing the note, pres s Exit .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 130 ⢠To stop the alarm and t o view the note, press Vie w . Press Snooze and the phone sounds an alarm again after 10 minutes. To -d o li s t You can save a note for a task that you have to do, select a priority level for the note and mar k it as done when you hav e completed it. You c an sort the not es by priority or by date. The to-do list uses shared memory, s ee Shared memory on page 14 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and T o-do list . Press Add not e to make a note. Key in the note and press Sa ve . Select the priority for t he note, High , Medium , or Lo w . The phone automatic ally sets the deadline without an alarm for the note. T o change the deadline, view t he note and select the deadline option. Or scr oll to a note and press View or press Options . ⢠To add a new note, select Add . ⢠For example, you can also v iew and delete t he selected note and del ete all the notes th at you have marke d as done. You can sort the notes by pr iority or by deadline, send a note t o another phone, save a note as a calendar note, or acces s the calendar. While viewing a note, y ou can also, for example, select an opt ion to e dit the selected note, edit th e deadline or prior ity for t he note, or ma rk the note as done.
Menu func t ions 131 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Note s You can use t he Note s application f or writing and s ending notes to compat ible devices via IR or MMS. The N otes applicat ion uses shared memor y, see Shared me mory on page 14 . Press Menu and s elect Organiser and Not es . The phone will a sk you to set the date and t ime, if they have not already been s et when you star t to wr ite a note. To add a note, pres s Add not e or press Options and select Make a note . Key in t he note and select Save . Or scr oll to a note press View or press Options to see the opt ions for note s. Synchronis ation Synchronisation allow s you to s ave your calenda r and contact s data on a remote Internet se rver (network s ervice) or on a c ompatible PC. If y ou have saved dat a on the remote Internet server, you can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can als o synchronise the data in your phoneâÂÂs conta cts, calendar and notes to c orrespond to the dat a of your compatible PC by starting the sy nchronisation from your PC. Note : The cont act data i n your SIM card will not be sy nchronised. Answering an incoming call during sy nchronisation will end the synchronisation and you will need to re-start it .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 132 Synchro nis ing fr om your phone Before synchronising from your phone, you need to subscribe to a sy nchronisation service and get the configuration settings fr om your provider. For more information on av ailability a nd the synchronisation s ervice sett ings, contact your network operator or service provider. To start the synchronisation fr om your phone: 1. Activa te the connection s ettings you need for the s ynchronisation. See Settings for the sy nchronisation from your phone on page 132 . 2. Press Menu , select O rganiser , Synchronisation , Server sync and Data to be synchronised . Mark the data to be synchronis ed and press Done . 3. Press Menu , and select Organiser , Synchronisation , Ser ver sync and Synchronise . 4. The marke d data of th e active set will be synchr onised after confirmation. Note that synchronising for the f irst time or a fter an interrupted synchronisation may take up to 30 minutes t o complete, if the c ontacts or calendar ar e full. Se ttin gs fo r the syn chr oni sati o n from you r pho ne You may receiv e the synchronisation sett ings as a configuration message f rom the network operator or service provider . For more informatio n on availability and the synchronisation service settings , contact y our network operator or service provider. For receiving t he settings as a configuration me ssage, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 17 . To key in the s ettings manually , see Configuration settings on page 11 3 .
Menu func t ions 133 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Menu , sele ct Organiser , Synchronisation and Server sync and Sync s ettings . Select 1. Configuration and scroll to t he service provider whose s ettings you would like to act ivate a nd p ress Select . 2. Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If mor e than one account is displayed c hoose the one y ou want to us e. Synchro nis ing fr om your compati ble PC To synchronise contacts, the calendar and the notes from your PC, us e either an IR connection or a data cable . You also nee d the PC Suite s oftware of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation fr om your PC using PC su ite. Nokia PC Suite id available on NokiaâÂÂs Web site at www.nokia.com. Ensure that the phone is in standby mode a nd that the time and date are set. â App licat ions Gam es and ap pl i cat io ns Your phone softwa re may include some games and applications specially de signed for th is Nokia phone. Launchi ng a ga me or a n appli catio n Press Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection . Scroll to a game or an application and press Open .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 134 Note th at running some games or applications may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery faster (and you may need t o connect the phone t o the charge r). Options avail able f or a g ame or an appli cati on Press Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection . Scroll to a game or an application and press Options . The following options may be available: ⢠Delete to delete the game or application from the phone. Note t hat if you de lete a pre-installed game or applic ation from your phone, you may download it again to your phone from the support ar ea on the Nok ia website www.nok ia.com. ⢠Details to give additional information about t he game or application. ⢠Update ve rsion to check if a new version is a vailable for download f rom the servic es (netw ork serv ice). ⢠Web page to provide further information or additional data from an Int ernet page. T his feature nee ds to be supported by the network. It is only show n if an Internet addr ess has bee n provided with the game or application. ⢠App. access to restric t the game or a pplication fr om accessing th e network to prevent you from ac cruing unexpected cos ts. Select Communication and Networ k access , Messaging or Connectivity , or select Phone access or Auto- star t . Select in each c ategory, if av ailable, one of t he following per missions: ⢠Ask ever y time and the phone as ks alway s for net ac cess. ⢠Ask first t ime only and the phone asks on first attempt at net ac cess. ⢠Always allowed to allow net access.
Menu func t ions 135 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Not allowed to dis allow net access. Do wn loa din g a game o r an ap plic atio n Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applic ations. Make su re that the application is compatible wit h your phone bef ore downloading it. Important: Only install appl icatio ns from source s that offer a dequate pro tectio n against harmful software. You can dow nload new Ja va applications in different ways: â¢P r e s s Men u , and select Applications , Games and Game downloads , or Collection and App. downloads and the lis t of available bookmarks is s hown. Select More bookmarks to access t he list of bookmarks in the Services menu, see B ookmarks on page 150 . Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired page. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page f rom the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, ent er the Service s menu and ac tivate another se t of service s ettings, see Making a connection to a se r vic e on page 146 . Try again to connect t o the page. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. â¢P r e s s Men u , and se le c t Services and Download links . See Downloading on page 151 . ⢠Use t he Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications in your phone.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 136 Note that Nokia does not warrant for applications from non-Nokia sites. If you choose to download Java a pplicatio ns from th em, you should take the same precaut ions, for security or conte nt, as you would with any site. Note t hat when downloading an application, it ma y be saved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. Game sett ings Press Me nu , and select Applic ations , Games and App. settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for games. Memory status for games and a pplic ati ons To vie w the amount of me mory available f or game and applic ation installations (third s hared memory), p ress Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection and th en Memory . The game s and applications use shared memory, see Shared memor y on page 14 . Calculato r The c alculator in your phone adds, s ubtracts, multiplies, divides, calculat es the squar e and t he square root and converts cur rency values. Note : This calc ulator has l imited accu racy and is desig ned for simple calculation s. 1.Press Me nu , and select Applications , Extras and Calculator . 2. When âÂÂ0â is displayed on the scre en, key in the first number in the calculat ion, press for a decimal point.
Menu func t ions 137 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 3. Press Options and select Ad d , Subt ract , Multiply , Divide , Squar e , Square root or Change sign . Tip: Alternatively, press once to add, twice to subtract, three times to multiply or f our times to divide. 4. Key in the s econd number. 5. To get the an swer, press Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is neces sary. 6. To s tart a new ca lculation, fir st press and hold Clear . Performing a currency conversion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Calculator . 2. To save the exchange rate, press Opt ions and select Exchange rat e . Select either of the display ed options. Key in the exc hange rate, pres s for a decimal poi nt, and press OK . The excha nge rate remains in t he memory until you replace it with anot her one. 3. To per form the cur rency conver sion, key in the amount to be c onverted, press Options and select In domestic or In foreign . Note : When you change base cu rrency, you must key in the new rates because all previousl y set exchange rate s are set to zero. Tip: You can als o perform t he currency conversion in s tandby mode. Key in the amount t o be convert ed, press Options and select In domestic or In foreign .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 138 Countd ow n t ime r Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Countdown t imer . Key in the alarm time in hours, minutes and seconds and pres s OK . If you wish, write your own note t ext which is displayed when the time expi res, and press Start to star t the countdown timer. ⢠To change the countdown time, select Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm time is reached when the phone is in standby mode, the phone sounds a to ne and flashes the note text if it is set or else Countdo wn time up . Stop t he alarm by pressing any k ey. If no key is pressed, the alarm automatically s tops within 30 seconds. To stop the alarm a nd to delete th e note text, press Exit . Stopw at ch You can me asure time, take intermediate t imes or lap times using the s topwatch. During timi ng, the other functions of the phone can be use d. To set the stopwatch timing i n the background, pr ess . Using the stop watch or allowi ng it to run in the b ackground when using ot her features incr ease s the dema nd on b att ery po wer an d re duces the batte ry li fe. Time observation and time splitting 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras , Stopwat ch and Split timing . You can select Continue if y ou have set the t iming in the background.
Menu func t ions 139 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 2. Press St art to star t the time obs ervation. Press Split every t ime you want t o take an intermediate time. The intermediate times are lis ted below t he running time on the display. Scroll to view the times. 3. Press St op to stop t he time obser vation. 4. To save the times, press Save and enter a name . Or press Options and select Start t o start the t ime observat ion again. The ne w time is added to t he previous t ime. Select Reset to res et the time without saving it. Lap times Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras , Stopwatch and Lap t iming . Press Start to s tart the time obs ervation and Lap to t ake a lap time. Press Stop to s top the lap timing. To sa ve the times , press Sa v e and enter a name. Or press Options and you can start or reset the lap t imes. Refer to Time observ ation and time splitting on page 138 . Viewing and deleting times Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch is not reset, you c an select Show las t to view th e mo st rec ent measured t ime. Select Vie w times and a list of names or final t imes of the t ime sets is shown, selec t the time se t that y ou want to vie w. To dele te the sav ed times, s elect Delete times . Select Delete all and press OK , or sel ect One by one , scroll t o the times you want t o delete, press Delet e and press OK .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 140 Wal l et In Wallet you ca n save personal inf ormation, for example, credit card numbers and addr esses. The dat a that ar e saved in the wallet can easily be retrieved while browsing t o automatically fill in data fields, for example, when making pur chases and t he service suppor ts wallet functionality. You ca n also save ac cess codes to mobile s ervices that request a user name and password. The data i n the walle t are pr otected with a w allet code that you ca n define whe n yo u acc ess wal let fo r th e fir st ti me. At Create wallet code: key in the code and press OK to confirm it and at Verify wallet code: key in the code again and press OK . See also Wallet code (4 t o 1 0 digits) on page 16 . If you want to de lete all the c ontent of the wallet and the wallet c ode, key in *#7370925538# (*#res wallet# in lett ers) in standby mode. You als o need the phoneâÂÂs security code, see A cces s codes on page 15 . To add the content into the wallet menu, and to edit it, access the wallet menu. To use the content of the wallet in a mobile service, access the wallet via t he browser, s ee Ser v ic e s on page 144 . Access ing t he wa llet me nu To ac cess the w allet menu, press Menu , sele c t Applications , Extras and Wallet . Key in your wallet c ode and press OK , see W allet settings on page 143 . Selec t ⢠Wallet profiles to create car d combinations, for example, for different servic es. A wallet profile is helpful if the service asks for many data items to be filled in. You can s elect the appropriate wallet pr ofile instead of selecting differ ent cards se para tel y.
Menu func t ions 141 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Cards to save pers onal card informat ion. You can save payment c ard, loyalty card and access card information, for example username and password combinations for different servic es, and also addres ses and user da ta. See Saving c ard details on page 141 . ⢠Ti ckets to save the notifications of e- tickets that you have bought via a mobile ser v ic e. T o vi e w t he ti c k et s , pr es s Options and select View . ⢠Receipts to save receipts of mobile purchases. ⢠Personal notes t o save all kinds of personal inf ormation that you want to keep protected by the wa llet PIN code. S ee P ersonal notes on page 14 1 . ⢠Settings , s ee Wallet settings on page 143 . Saving c ard detail s Access t he wallet and s elect Cards . Select the card type to save details: Pay m e n t car ds , Loyalt y cards , Acc ess ca rd s , User info c ards , o r Address cards . If no c ard is added, pres s Add new , ot herwise, press Options an d s e le c t Add new . Fill in th e fields fo r the details and press Don e . If supported by your servic e provider, you c an also receiv e card information t o your phone as a configur ation message. You will be notified as t o which category the card belongs to. For availability of receiving car d information as configuration settings, c ontact the card issuer or service pr ovider. Persona l notes You can s ave personal notes, for ex ample, account number s, passwords, codes or notati ons .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 142 Access t he wallet and s elect Personal notes . P re s s Options and you can view, add, edit a s elected note and sort notes either by na me or date or delete notes. When viewing a note, yo u can edit or delete the selected note. The option Send via text msg. is for copy ing the note as a text message and Copy t o calendar is for copying the note to the calendar as a memo. U se detail is for extract ing numbers, e-ma il addresses a nd web addr esses from a not e. Creati ng a wall et prof ile When you have saved y our personal card details , you can c ombine them toget her into a wallet profile. You can use the profile to retrieve wallet data from different cards w hile browsing. 1. Access t he wallet and s elect Wallet profiles . 2. To creat e a new wallet profile if no profile is added, press Add new . Otherwis e, press Option s and sele ct Add new . 3. Fill in the f ollowing fields and press Done . Some of the fields cont ain data that are sel ected from t he wallet. You need to sav e those data before you can create a w allet profile. ⢠Select payment card nex t - select a car d from the pay ment card list. ⢠Select loyalty card ne xt - selec t a card fr om the loy alty card list. ⢠Select access card next - select a car d from the access card list . ⢠Select user info card next - selec t a card fr om the user data card list . ⢠Select billing address next - select an address from the addres s card list. ⢠Select s hipping address next - select an addres s from the ad dress card lis t.
Menu func t ions 143 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Select receipt deliv ery address next - se lect an address from the address card list. ⢠Select receipt deliv ery method next - select how the receipt is to be delivered, To phone number or T o e-mail address . ⢠Wallet profile name: enter a name for the pr ofile. Some of t he fields cont ain data that ar e selected from the wallet. You need to save those data before you can cr eate a walle t profile. Wa ll et s etti n gs Access t he wallet and s elect Se ttings . Select Change code to cha nge the wal let code. Se lect RFID to se t the RF ID ID with the RFID code and RF ID type . (RF ID = Radio Frequency Identificat ion, techn ology to securely conduct commercial transactions us ing your phone). Guidel ine s for pa yi ng for yo ur pur ch ases wit h th e wal let ⢠To do your shopping, acc ess the des ired service site that supports the wallet. The s ervice needs t o support the Elec tronic Commerce Modelling Language specifica tion. See Making a connection to a service on page 146 . Choose the pr oduct that you want t o buy and carefu lly read all information provid ed before your purc hase. The text may not fit within a s ingle screen. Therefore, mak e sure to scroll through and read all of the te xt before your purchase. ⢠To pay for the items that you wish to b uy, the phone ask s whether you want to use w allet or not. T he phone also a sks for your wa llet PIN code.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 144 ⢠Se lec t the c ard th at you w ant to p ay wi th from th e Pay ment cards list. Provi ded that the dat a form you receive from the servic e provider suppor ts the Elect ronic Commerce Modelling Language specification, th e phone automatically fills in t he credit c ard information or the wallet pr ofile from the wallet. ⢠Approve the purchase, and the informat ion is forwarded. ⢠You may receive an acknowledgement or a digital receipt of t he purchase. ⢠To clos e the wallet, select Close wallet . If you do not us e the wallet for 5 minutes, it will be a utomatically clos ed. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data tempor arily. If you have tr ied to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passw ords, empty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have acce ssed is stor ed in the cache. To empty the cache , see The cache memory on page 153 . â Ser vi ce s You can access various mobile Internet services with your phoneâÂÂs browser. These se rvices may include for ex ample, weather reports, news or f light times and financial information. Check th e availability of these s ervices, prici ng and tarif fs with yo ur network opera tor and/or the ser vice provider whos e service you wish to us e. Serv ice providers wi ll also give you instruct ions on how to use their services.
Menu func t ions 145 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. With your phoneâÂÂs browser you can v iew the servic es that use W ireless Mark-Up Language (WML) or extensible HyperText Mark-up L anguage (xHTML) on their pages. Appearance may va ry due to s creen size . Note that y ou may not be able t o view a ll the details of the Int ernet pages. Basic st eps for acc ess ing a nd u sing se rvi ces 1. Save t he service settings that ar e required to access t he service that you want to use. See page 145 . 2. Make a connection to t he given s ervice. See p age 146 . 3. Start browsing the pages of the s ervice. See page 147 . 4. Once you are finished browsing, end the connection to t he service. See page 148 . Sett ing up th e p hon e for a ser vi ce Your p hone may have stored some service s ettings. Additional s ettings may be received as a configuration mess age from the network operat or or service provide r that offe rs th e serv ice tha t you wan t to use. To recei ve the s ervice settings as a configur ation message, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 17 and Configuration s ettings on page 11 3 . For mor e information and f or the appropriate settings, contact the network opera tor or service provider that offers the s ervice that y ou want to use.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 146 Ma ki ng a co nne ctio n to a s ervi ce 1. Make s ure that the service settings of the service y ou want to us e are activa ted. To ac tiva te the settin gs : Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Settings and Configuration settings . Select Configuration and select th e configuration set you want to activate. 2. Mak e a connection t o the ser vice. There are t hree ways to c onnect: ⢠Open the start page, for example, the homepage of t he service provider: Press Menu , and select Serv ices and Home , or in standby mode pres s and hold . ⢠Se lect a bookmar k of the service: Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Bookmarks , and select a bookmark. If the bookmark does not work with t he current act ive servi ce settings, activat e another set of service settings and try aga in. ⢠Select the last URL: Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Last web addr . . ⢠Ke y in the addre ss of the s ervice: Press Menu , and select Serv ices and then Go to address . Key in the addre ss of the service and press OK .
Menu func t ions 147 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Br owsin g the pag es of a service After you have made a connection to the service, you can start browsing its pages. The funct ion of the phone keys ma y vary in diff erent services. Follow the text guides o n the phone display. For more information, c ontact your serv ice provider. Note that if GPRS is s elected as the data bearer, the indicator is shown on the top l eft of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a text mess age, or make a call during an (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top l eft of the display to indicate that the (E)GPRS connec tion is suspended (on hold). After a call, f or example, the phone tries t o reconnect the (E)GPRS connection. Using th e phon e keys whi le bro wsi ng ⢠Us e the joystick to browse t hrough the page . ⢠To s elect a highlighte d item, pres s , or pres s Options to select t he option for opening th e link. ⢠To ente r letters and numbers, press the keys - and to enter special char acters, press the key . Options while br owsing Press Option s and the following options may be ava ilable. The ser vice provider may als o offer other options. Select ⢠Shortcuts to open a ne w list of options that ar e, for ex ample, specific to the page. ⢠Home to open t he home page of the selec ted service provider .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 148 ⢠Add bookmark to save the page as a bookmark. ⢠Bookmarks . See Bookmarks on page 150 . ⢠Histo ry to get a lis t showing last vi sited URLs. ⢠Download links to show t he list of bookmarks for downloading. ⢠Save t o folder to save the c urrent page to a download folder . ⢠Other options to show a list of ot her options, f or example options f or some security opt ions. ⢠Reload to reload and update the curr ent page. ⢠Quit . See Disconnect from a service on page 148 . A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data tempor arily. If you have tr ied to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passw ords, empty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have acce ssed is stor ed in the cache. To empty the cache, see The cache memory on pa g e 153 . Direct call ing The browse r supports functions that y ou can access while b rowsing. You can make a voic e call, s end DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and s ave a name and a phone numbe r from a page. Di sco n ne ct f ro m a se rvi ce To quit br owsing and to e nd the connection, press Options and select Qui t . W h en Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press twice, or press and hold
Menu func t ions 149 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Appe ar an ce set ti ngs of th e brow ser While brows ing, press Options and select Other options and Appear . se ttings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Se rvices , Se ttings and Appearance settings . Select ⢠Text wrapping . Select On and the text continues on the next line. If you select Off , the text will be abbreviate d. ⢠Font si ze and choose a size. ⢠Show images . Select No and any pictures a ppearing on the page are not shown. This can speed up the browsing of pages that contain a lot of pictures. ⢠Alerts and select Alert for unsecure connection and Yes to set the ph one to aler t when a sec ure connection c hanges to an insecure one dur ing browsing. Select Alert for uns ecure items and Yes to set t he pho ne to alert when a secu re page cont ains an insecure item. Note that these alert s do not guarantee a secure connection. For more information, see Brow se r sec urity on page 153 . ⢠Character encoding to select th e character set that the phone uses for showing browser pages that do not include that information or to s elect whether to always use UTF- 8 encoding when s ending a Web addr ess to a compatible phone. Cooki es A cookie is data t hat a site saves in your phoneâÂÂs browser cache memory. The data can be, for example, your user informa tion or your browsing preferences. Cookies
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 150 will be saved until you clear the c ache memory, s ee The ca che memory on page 153 . 1. While browsing, press O ptions and select Other options , Securit y and Cookie settings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and s elect Services , Settin gs , Securit y setti ngs and Cookies . 2. Select Allow or Rej ec t t o allow the phone t o or prevent the phone from receiving c ookies. Bookma rks You can save page addresses as bookmarks in the phoneâÂÂs memory. 1. While browsing, press O ptions and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Services and Bookmarks . 2. Scroll t o the bookmark that you want to us e and press Select t o m a k e a connect ion to the page associated with the bookmar k. Or sele ct Options to view t he title and t he address of the select ed bookmark, edit or delete the selected bookmark, or s end it directly to another phone as a bookmar k, or as a text mes sage, or cr eate a new b ookmark. Your device may have some bookma rks load ed for site s not affili ate d to Nokia. Nokia d oes not warrant or endors e these sit es. If you ch oose to acces s them, you should take the sa me precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site.
Menu func t ions 151 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Receiv in g a boo kmark When you have receiv ed a bookmar k (sent as a book mark) 1 bookmark received is displaye d. Press Show to view the bookmark To save the bookmark, press Save , or press Option s and sele ct View to see the details or De lete to discar d it. To disc ard the bookmark directly after you hav e received t he bookmark, pres s Ex it and OK . Dow nl o ad in g To downloa d more tones, gr aphics, games, v ideos, themes or applications to your phone (networ k service), pre ss Menu , and s elect Services and Download links . Select Tone downloads , Graphic downloads , Game down loads , V ideo downloads , Theme downloads or App. downloads . Imp ortan t: Only ins tall ap plicatio ns from source s that offer adequate protect ion against harmful software. For the availability of different services, pricing and t ariffs, contact your network operator and/or service prov ider. Servi ce inbo x The phone is able to r eceive ser vice messages (pushe d messages) s ent by your service provider (networ k service). Service mes sages are notificat ions of, f or example, news headlines, and they may contain a text message or a n address of a servi ce. To a cce s s the Service inbox in s tandby mode, when y ou have r eceived a ser vice message, pr ess Show .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 152 If you press Exit the me ssage is moved to the Service inbox . To ac cess th e Service inbox later, pres s Menu , and s elect Services and Service inbox . To a cce s s the Service inbox while browsing, press O ptions and select Othe r options and Se rvice inbox . Scr oll to the message that you want, pr ess Re trieve to activat e the brows er and download t he marked cont ent, or press Options and sel ect Details to display det ailed information on the servic e notification, or select Delete to delete it. Se rvic e in bo x se ttin gs Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Settings and Ser vice inbox settings . â¢S e l e c t Service mes sages and On (or Off ) to set the phone to re cei ve (or not to receive) service messages. â¢S e l e c t Message filter and On to set th e phone to receive service mes sages only from c ontent authors approv ed by the se rvice provider. To view the list of th e approved cont ent authors, select T rusted channels . â¢S e l e c t Automatic connection . If y ou have se t the phone t o receive s ervice messages and select On , the phone will automatical ly activ ate the browser from sta ndby mode when t he phone has received a s ervice mes sage. If you select Off , the phone will act ivate the browser only afte r you have sel ect e d Retrieve when the phone has received a service mes sage.
Menu func t ions 153 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The cache memory The informa tion or services that you hav e access ed are stored in the cache of your phone. A c ache is a buffer me mory, which is used to stor e data temporarily. To emp t y th e c a che : ⢠while br owsing, pres s Options and select Other options and Clear the cache , or ⢠in standby mode, press Menu , and select Services , and Clear the cac he . Br owse r se curi ty Security features may be required for s ome service s, such as banking services or online shoppi ng. For such c onnections you need security certificates and possibly a se curity module which may be available on your SIM c ard. For more information, contact your service provider. Securi ty modul e The se curity module can contain c ertificates as w ell as private and public k eys. The purpose of t he securit y module is to improve securit y services for applications requiring brows er connection, and it allows you to use a digital signature. The certificat es are s aved in the s ecurity module by the s ervice provider . Press Menu and select Services , Settings , Sec urity settings and Security module settings . Select ⢠Secur ity module details to show the s ecurity module title, its status, manufacturer and serial number.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 154 ⢠Module PIN request to set the phone to request t he module PIN when using service s provided by security module. Key in the c ode and select On . To disable the module PIN request, select Off . ⢠Change module PIN to change t he module PIN, if allowed by t he security module. Enter the current module PIN code, t hen enter the new c ode twice. ⢠Change signing PIN . Select the signing PIN that you want to change . Enter t he current PIN code, t hen enter the new code twice. See als o Access codes on page 15 . Ce rtif ica tes There are three kinds of certificates: server certificat es, authority certificates and user ce rtificates. ⢠The phone uses a server certificate to create a connection with improved securit y to the c ontent server . The phone receives t he server c ertificate from the service provider be fore the connection is es tablished and its validity is checke d using the author ity certificates s aved in the phone. Server certif icates ar e n ot s a ve d. The s ecurity indicator is displayed during a connection if the data transmission between the phone and the content server is encrypted. The s ecurity icon does not indicate t hat the dat a transmission between the gateway and the cont ent server (or place where t he request ed resource is stored) is secure. The service provider s ecures the dat a transmission between the gat eway and th e con tent s erver.
Menu func t ions 155 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Author ity certificate s are used by some service s, such as banking services , for checking the validity of other certificates. Authority certific ates can either be saved in the secur ity module by t he service provider, or they can be downloaded fr om the network, if the s ervice supports t he use of aut hority certificat es. ⢠Us er certificates a re issued t o users by a Cer tifying Authority. User ce rtificates are r equired, for exampl e, to cr eate a digit al signature and t hey ass ociate the user wit h a spec ific private k ey in a s ecurity module. Imp ortan t: Note tha t even if the u se of certi fica tes makes th e risks invo lved in remote con nections a nd software installa tion consi derably sm aller, th ey must be used correctly in order to bene fit from increased security. The existence of a certif icate d oes not offer any prot ection by it self; th e cer tificate ma nager must contain correct, authe ntic, or trus ted certifi cates for increased sec urity to be available. Certificates have a res tricte d lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is s hown even if the certifi cate should be valid, check that the current date and tim e in your device are corre ct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner o f the cer tif icate an d that th e certi ficat e real ly belon gs to the li sted owne r. Digital s ignat ure You can ma ke digital signatures with your phone if your SIM card has a security module. The signature can be traced back to you via the private key on the sec urity module and t he user cer tificate t hat was used to perform the s ignature. Using the digital signature can be the same as signing your name to a paper bill, contract or other doc ument.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 156 To mak e a digital signat ure, selec t a link on a pa ge, for exa mple, the t itle of the book that you want to buy and it s price. The text to s ign (possibly including amount, date, etc.) will be shown. Check tha t the he ader text is Re ad and that the digital s ignature icon is show n. Note : If the digit al signature icon doe s not a ppear, there is a security breach, and you should not e nter any pers onal data such as your signing PIN. To s ign the text, r ead all of t he text fi rst and then you can s elect Sign . The text may not f it within a s ingle screen. Therefore, mak e sure to scroll through and read all of th e text before s igning. Select t he user cer tificate you want to use. Key in t he signing PIN (see Ge ne ra l information on page 12 ) and press OK . The digital signature icon will disappear, and t he service ma y display a confirmation of your purchase. â SIM s ervic es In addit ion to the functions a vailable on the phone, your SIM card may provide addit ional services that you can acces s in this menu which is shown only if it is s upported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend on t he SIM car d. For availa bility, rates and inf ormation on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor, e.g. network operator, service provider or other vendor.
Menu func t ions 157 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Depending on the operator you can set the phone to show you the c onfirmation messages sent between your phone and the net work when y ou are using t he SIM service s by selecting t he option Ye s wi thin the m enu Confir m SIM service actions , in Phone s ettings . Note that accessing these services may involve sending messages or making a phone call for which y ou may be cha rged.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 158 7. PC Connect ivit y You can s end and receiv e e-mails, and access the Int ernet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR c onnection or via a data cable connection. You can us e your phone wit h a vari ety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you c an, for example, s ynchronise contacts, c alendar and to- do notes and notes between your phone and the compatible PC or a remote Inte rnet server (networ k service). You may find more information a nd downloadable f iles, for example PC suite, in the support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia.com. â PC Su ite PC Suite contains the f ollowing applications (in alphabetical order): ⢠HTML H el p to support t he application usage. ⢠Nokia 7260 data modem drivers enable y ou to use your phone as a modem. ⢠Nokia Application Installer t o install J2ME Java applications from a compatible PC t o the phone , for example games and dictiona ries. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select the connection type between the PC and phone. ⢠Nokia Contact s Editor to edit contacts in your phone.
PC Con nec tivit y 159 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to back-up and restore pe rsonal data between your phone and a compatible PC. Supports also content transfer t o another compatible N okia phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to make images in su pported formats usabl e for multimedia messages or wall paper and to t ransfer them to y our phone. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for HSCSD and GPRS connec tions. ⢠Nokia Multimedia Player to for playing sounds, images , videos and multimedia messages on the P C. Multimedia Playe r allows you t o view multimedia received on y our phone or vi a e-mail. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calendar and to- do notes between your phone and a compatible PC. ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to view the contents of t he Gallery f older of your phone on a c ompatible PC. You can br owse picture a nd audio files and also modify files in the phoneâÂÂs memory and transfer files between your phone and PC. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages and edit t he contacts in your phone. ⢠Nokia Settings Manager to edit and send your br owser bookmarks or update the connect ion sets to your phone. You can also search for r adio channels, and delete, edit or modify t he current radio channe ls on your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to optimise poly phonic ringing tones in s upported formats to be compatible with your phone and to tra nsfer them to your phone. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ring ing t ones , and o ther conten t from bei ng c o pi ed , mo di fie d, tr ans f err ed or f o rwa rd ed.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 160 (E)G P RS, H SC SD a nd C SD With your phone you c an use the (E)GPRS (Enhanced GPRS), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Cir cuit Switched D ata, GSM data ) data s ervices. For availa bility and subsc ription to data services, cont act your network operator or service provider. Note t hat the use of HSCSD ser vices consumes the phoneâÂÂs bat tery faster t han normal voice or dat a calls. You may need to c onnect the phone t o a charger for the duration of the dat a transfer. See (E)G PRS modem settings on pa ge 11 2 . â Us ing data comm unica tion applica tion s For information on using a data commu nication application, refer to the document ation provided with it. Note th at making or answering phone calls during a computer connec tion is not recommended as it might disr upt the operation. For bet ter performance during dat a calls, place the phone on a stationar y surface with the keypad f acing downward. D o not move t he phone by holding it in your hand during a da ta call.
Ba tter y info rmat ion 161 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 8. Batte ry i nfo rma ti on â Charg ing and Di schar gi ng Your de vice is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only afte r two or three complet e charge and disc harge cycles. Th e battery can be ch arged and d isc harge d hundr eds of tim es but it will eventua lly wear out. W hen the talk an d standby times are noticeably sho rter than normal, b uy a new battery. Use o nly Nokia appr ov ed ba tter i es , a nd r ech a rge yo ur bat ter y o nl y wi th Nok ia ap pro ved ch ar ger s designated for this device. Unplug th e char ger from the ele ctrical plug a nd th e devi ce when not in use. Do no t leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging m ay shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged batt ery will lo se its charge o ver time . Temperatu re extr emes can affect the abilit y of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is dama ged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Accid ental short -circuiti ng can occur when a meta llic object such as a coin, clip , or pen cau ses direct co nnection of t he positive ( ) an d negative (- ) terminals of the b attery. (Thes e look like meta l strips on th e battery. ) This might happ en, for example, when you carr y a spare battery in yo ur pocket o r purse. Short-cir cuiti ng the terminals ma y damage the batt ery or the con necting object . Leaving the batte ry in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in s ummer or winter conditions, w ill reduce the capacit y and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF) . A device with a hot or col d battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temper atures we ll belo w freezin g.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 162 Do not dis pose of b atte ries in a fire ! Di spose of ba tteri es a ccordi ng to loca l reg ulati ons. Please recycl e when pos sible. Do not dispo se as househ old waste.
CARE AND M AINTENANCE 163 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. CARE AN D MAIN TENA NCE You r de v ice is a pr od uc t of s up eri or d es ign and cr afts m ans h ip and s ho ul d be tre a te d w ith care. The suggestions bel ow will help you prot ect your warranty coverage. ⢠K eep th e devic e dry. Prec ipitat ion, humi dity a nd al l types of liqu ids o r moi sture ca n contain mineral s that will co rrode electron ic circuits. If yo ur device does get wet, remo ve the battery a nd allo w the device to dr y completely b efore rep lacin g it. ⢠D o not us e or stor e the device in d usty, d irty a reas . Its movi ng part s an d el ectron ic co mpon ents can be d ama ged. ⢠Do not st ore the devic e in h ot a reas. High tempera tures can shorten the life of elect ronic de vices, dama ge b atterie s, and war p or m elt ce rtain plas tics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device ret urns to its normal tem perature, mo isture can form i nsid e the d evice and d ama ge el ectron ic cir cuit bo ards . ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough han dling can break in ternal circuit b oards and fi ne mec han ics . ⢠Do not us e harsh che micals, cleani ng solven ts, or stron g dete rgents to clean t he devi ce. ⢠D o not pa int the de vice. Paint c an cl og t he mov ing par ts an d p revent pr ope r ope ration. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lenses (such as camera, pro ximity sen sor, and light s ensor l enses). ⢠U se o nly th e sup plied or an a ppro ved re place men t an tenna. U nau thorise d ant ennas, mo dificat ions, or att achme nts co uld dam age t he dev ice and may v iola te reg ulatio ns gov ernin g radio devices.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 164 All of the abov e suggesti ons apply equal ly to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any d evice is not workin g properly, t ake i t to the neares t authorize d service facility for service.
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 165 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ADDI TION AL S AFE TY IN F ORMA T ION â Tra ffi c Sa fe ty Do not us e a h and-he ld te lephone while drivi ng a v ehic le. Alwa ys secur e the phone in its holder; do not place the pho ne on the pa sseng er seat o r where it can brea k loose in a co llision or s udden stop . Remember road safety always comes firs t! â Operat ing envir onment Remember to f ollow any spe cial regula tions in f orce in an y area and alw ays switch of f your device whe n its us e is proh ibited or when it may cause interfer ence or danger . Use the d evic e only in its norma l opera ting posi tions. T o mainta in complia nce with radio fre quency exposur e guidel ines only u se enha ncements approv ed by Nokia for use with th is de vice. Wh en the device is on a nd being w orn on the b ody, alwa ys use an a pprov ed hold er or carrying case. Parts of the device a re magnetic. Metalli c materi als may be attract ed to the device , and pers o ns wi t h a he ar in g a id s hou ld not ho ld the dev ic e to the ea r wit h t he h ear ing aid. Al way s secure the devi ce in its hold er, b ecause meta llic mate rials may be attract ed by the ea rpiece. Do n ot p la ce cr edit ca rd s o r o th er mag net ic s tor ag e me d ia n ea r th e dev ice , b ec au se informatio n stored on them ma y be erased. â Medical dev ices Ope ration of a ny ra dio tra nsmit ting e quipme nt, inc lud ing wire less p hon es, may interf ere with the functi onality o f ina dequately p rotected medical d evices. Co nsult a physician or t he manufacturer of the med ical de vice to deter mine if they are adeq uately shi elded from
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 166 external RF energ y or if you have any q uestions. Switch off your device in health care facilitie s when an y regulatio ns pos ted in th ese area s instr uct you to do so. Hospi tals o r health care f aciliti es may be usin g equipment th at could be sensitive to extern al RF ener gy. Pacemaker s Pacemaker manu facture rs recommen d that a mi nimum separa tion of 6 in . (15.3 cm) be mai ntaine d be tween a wi reless phone an d a pac emake r to a void p ote ntial in terfe rence with the pacemaker. These recommenda tions are consistent wit h the independ ent research b y and recommendat ions of Wire less Tec hnolo gy Research . Persons wi th pacemake rs should : ⢠always keep the de vice more than 6 in. (15. 3 cm) from their pacema ker when the device is switched on; ⢠n ot ca rry the de vice i n a br east poc ket; and ⢠h old the dev ice t o the ear oppos ite t he pac emak er to m ini mise the pot ent ial for interference. If you have any reason to sus pect that inte rference is tak ing place, sw itch off your device immediately. Hearing a ids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with so me hearing aids. If interference occurs, consu lt your servi ce provide r. â Potent iall y ex plosi ve envi ro nment s Switch off your device when in any area with a pot entially ex plos ive atmosp here and obey all signs and instr uctions. Potenti ally exp losiv e atmosphere s includ e areas where you woul d normally be advised to turn off your vehicle eng ine. Sparks in s uch areas could cause an explosion or fire res ulting in bodily injury or even death. Sw itch off the device at refuelling poi nts such as near g as pum ps at serv ice sta tion s. Obse rve rest ric tion s on t he u se of radi o
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 167 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. eq uipmen t in fuel depots , sto rage, a nd distri bution are as, che mic al pla nts o r wh ere b lasting operatio ns are in pr ogress . Areas wit h a potenti all y explosive atmospher e are oft en but not always clea rly mark ed. They in clude b elow deck o n boats, chemical tr ansf er or sto rage fac ilities , vehi cles usi ng liqu efie d petro leum g as (s uch as prop ane or butane ), and area s where the air co ntains chemicals o r particle s such as g rain, dust or me tal powder s. â Vehicl es RF signals may affect impro perly inst alled or inadequ ately shie lded electronic s ystems i n motor vehicl es such as el ectronic f uel inje ction sys tems, elect ronic a ntisk id (antilo ck) br aking sys tems, ele ctr onic spe ed con trol syst em s, ai r bag s yst ems. Fo r more inf orma tio n, check with the ma nufactur er or its represent ative of your vehicle o r any e quipment tha t has be en adde d. Only qualif ied perso nnel shoul d service the device, o r install th e device in a vehicle . Faulty installatio n or servi ce may be da ngerous and ma y invalidate any warranty t hat may apply to the device. Ch eck regula rly that all w ireless device equip ment in your veh icle is mounted and opera tin g pr operly . Do n ot s tore or ca rry f lamm abl e liq uids , gase s, or expl osiv e mat eria ls in the same compar tment as th e device, it s parts, or enh anceme nts. For vehicle s equip ped with an air b ag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, incl udin g inst alle d or po rtab le w irel ess eq uipme nt in the area over t he a ir bag or in the air bag deploy ment area . If in- vehicl e wireles s equip ment is imp roperl y insta lled and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your de vice while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be da ngerous to the operatio n of the airc raft, d isrupt th e wirele ss tele phone network, and may be ille gal.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 168 â Emergen cy ca lls Important: Wir e les s p hon es , i nc lud in g th is de vi ce, o per ate us in g ra di o s ig nal s , wir el es s networks , landline n etworks, a nd user-p rogrammed functions . Because of this , connecti ons in all condition s cannot b e guarante ed. You s hould never rely sole ly on any wireles s device for essenti al communica tions lik e medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal streng th. Some network s may require that a valid SIM card is prop erly inser ted in the de vice. 2. Press as many tim es as need ed to clear the dis play and ready th e device for cal ls. 3. Key in the official emergency number for your pr esent lo cation. Emerge ncy numbers vary by lo ca t io n. 4. Press t he key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency cal l. If th e device is in of fline or fli ght mode you must change the pr ofile to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service pro vider for more information. When making an emergency call , give all the necessary i nformation as ac curately as possible. Y our wirel ess device ma y be the only mea ns of commun icatio n at the scen e of an acc ident. Do not end the call un til gi ven per missio n to do so. â Ce rtif icat ion inf orma tio n (S AR ) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTE RNATIONA L GUIDELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio trans mitte r and receiver. It is design ed and manufac tured no t to exceed the lim its for exposur e to radio freque ncy (RF) reco mmended by in ternat ional
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 169 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. guideli nes (ICNI RP). Th ese limi ts are par t of compr ehensi ve guide lines and establ ish permitte d levels of RF energy f or the genera l popu lation. T he guidel ines were develop ed by inde pe nd en t sc ie nt ifi c org an is at io ns th rou gh per i odi c an d t hor ou gh eva lu ati on of sc ie nt if ic studies. The guidelin es in clude a subst antia l safety ma rgin desig ned to assur e the safe ty of all perso ns, regardless of age and health. The exposu re standard for mobile devices emplo ys a unit of measureme nt known as the Specifi c Absorpt ion Rate, or SAR. Th e SAR limi t stated in the inter natio nal gu idelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard op erating positi ons with the device tra nsmit ting a t its hi ghes t certi fied pow er level in all t ested freque ncy b ands. Althou gh the SA R is de termi ned at the high est cert ifi ed po wer leve l, t he actua l SA R of the device w hile operatin g can be well belo w the maxi mum value. T his is becau se the d evice is desi gned to operate at mult ip le power leve ls so as to use only th e power req uired to rea ch the ne twork. In general, the clo ser you ar e to a base stat ion, the low er the power outpu t of the devic e. The highes t SAR value fo r this device when tes ted fo r use at the e ar is 0.51 W/kg. This device meets RF exp osure gui del ines when used eit her in the normal use pos ition again st t he ear o r when pos iti oned at le as t 2.2 c m away fro m th e bod y. Whe n a c arry c ase, bel t c lip or h o ld er i s used fo r bo d y- wor n op er a tio n, it sh oul d n ot con ta in me tal an d sh ou ld pos ition the pr oduct at le ast 2.2 c m awa y fr om y our body . In order to transmit d ata files or me ssages, thi s device require s a quality connect ion to the network. In so me case s, transmis sion of data files o r messages may be delay ed until such a connection is ava ilable. Ensure the above se paration dis tance instr ucti ons are followed unt il the trans mission is co mplete d. * T he SAR limit for mobil e device s use d by the pu blic i s 2.0 w atts/ kilog ram (W /kg) av era ged over ten grams of bod y tissue . The guidel ines i ncorp orate a subst anti al marg in of safety to gi ve addit ional p rotec tion for the publ ic and to acco unt for any v ariations in m easur ements. SA R value s may vary dependin g on nationa l repor ting requi rements and t he net work band.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 170 For SAR informa tion in other regions please look under product information at www. no k ia. co m.
DECLARATI ON OF CONFORMITY We, NO KIA CORPO RATI ON d ecl are u nder ou r so le r esp onsi bi lity that th e produ ct R M-17 i s i n con for mit y with the p rov ision s of the follo wing Co uncil Dir ecti ve: 1999/ 5/EC. A c opy of the D e cla ratio n o f Co nfo rmit y ca n be fo un d fr om ht tp:/ /w ww. nok ia. com /ph on es/ decl ara tio n_ of_co n for mit y/. Copy r ig ht é 20 04 N oki a . Al l ri gh ts res e rv ed . Reprodu cti on , tr ansf er, dis tr ibuti on or s tora ge of part or a ll o f th e co nten ts i n thi s d ocume nt in any for m without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Xpress-on and Pop-Por t are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Cor porat ion . O ther prod uc t and comp any n ame s men tio ned he rei n ma y be tr ade mar ks o r tra denam es of th eir resp ectiv e own ers. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 58184 37 and oth er pend ing pa tents . T9 text inpu t soft ware Copyr ight (C) 1997 -2004. Tegi c Comm unications, Inc. All rights reserved. Inclu des RS A BS AFE c rypto graph ic or securi ty pro tocol so ftw are from RSA S ecuri ty. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Noki a oper ate s a po li cy of cont in uous deve lopm ent . N okia r ese rve s t he rig ht t o ma ke ch ange s and improvements to any of the pro ducts described in this doc ument without prior notice.
Un der n o circ umsta nce s sh all N okia be re sponsi ble fo r an y los s of d ata or inco me or any speci al, inci den tal, con sequ enti al or in di rect dam ages h owsoe ver ca used. T h e c o n t e n t s o f t h i s d o c u m e n t a r e p r o v i d e d " a s i s " . E x c e p t a s r e q u i r e d b y a p p l i ca b l e l a w , n o w a r r a n t i e s o f an y kin d, e ithe r exp ress or i mpli ed, inclu ding , bu t no t limi ted to, t he im plie d w arran tie s of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose , are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice. The av ail abili ty of part icu lar pr od ucts m ay va ry by re gion . Pl ease che ck wi th th e No kia deale r nea re st t o you. Ex port Co ntro ls This devi ce may c on tain commod iti es, t ech nol ogy or soft wa re sub ject to export laws and regul at ions fro m the U S and ot her coun tries . Dive rsion c ont rary t o law i s prohib ite d. 9231 76 9 / I s sue 1
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4 Contents FFOR YOUR SAFETY............................................................................ ................. 10 General information ............... .............................. ............................................... 12 About your d evice .............................. ................................. ................ ............................... . ...................... 12 Overvie w of the functions of the phone ....................... ................................ ................................ .. .... 12 Shared memo ry ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. .............. ....... 14 Nokia PC Suite software ................... ................................. ................ ................................ .... .................. 14 Acce ss codes ........................ ................................ ................. ................................ .......... ...................... ...... 15 Securit y code (5 to 10 digits) ....................................... ................................ .......................... ............ 15 PIN and PIN 2 codes (4 to 8 digits), Mod ule PIN and Sign ing PIN ..................................... ...... 15 PUK and PU K2 codes (8 digits).... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ......... 16 Barring passwo rd (4 digits) .......................... ................. ................................ ......................... ....... ...... 16 Wallet cod e (4 to 10 digits) ......................... ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ...... 16 Netwo rk service s. ................................ ................................. ................ ............................. ... ...................... 17 Configur ation settings service .... ................................. ................ ................................ ............ .......... 17 Dow nloading conte nt and applic ations ....... ................. ................................ ................................ ... ... 18 Nokia sup port on the Web ............... ................................. ................ ................................ ....... ......... ...... 19 1. Getting started ................................................. ............................................... 20 Instal ling the S IM ca rd and t he batte ry........................................ ................ ................................ ...... 20 Chargi ng the b attery ......................... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 22 Switc hing th e phone on and off .... ................................. ................................ ................ ............ .......... 23 Norm al operating posit ion ............................... ................. ................................ ...................... ................ 24 Putt ing on a wrist strap.................... ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. ...... 25
Con tents 5 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 2. Your phone.......................... ............................................................ ................. 26 Keys and connectors .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... ...... 26 Stand by mode ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .... ...................... 28 Wallpape r .......... ................................ ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ...................... 29 Screen s aver ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ...... 29 Power s aving .... ................ ................................ ................................. .............................. .................. ...... 30 Essential in dicators ......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ..................... 30 Keyp ad lock (Keyguard) .................... ................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ...... 32 3. Call funct ions ..................... ............................................................ ................. 34 Making a ca ll ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ .......... ...... ...................... 34 Speed dialling a phone num ber .. ................................. ................................ ................ ............... . ...... 35 Answe ring or rejecting an incom ing call ...................... ................................ ................ .................. .... 35 Call w aiting....... ................ ................................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ...... 36 Opti ons during a call ......................... ................................. ................ ................................ ...................... 36 4. Writing text ........................ ............................................................ ................. 38 Setting pre dictive text input on or off .......................... ................ ................................ .............. .. ...... 38 Using predicti ve text i nput .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ...... 38 Writing c ompoun d words ............................. ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ...... 39 Using tradition al text input ............. ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................. 39 Tips for wri ting text ........................... ................ ................................. .............................. .. ................ ...... 40 5. Using th e menu .................. ............................................................ ................. 42 Acce ssing a m enu func tion ............. ................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ ...... 42 List of menu func tions ...... ................................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. ...... 43
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6 6. Menu functions ................................................ ............................................... 48 Me ssages ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ...................... 48 Text messages (S MS) ...................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................. 48 Flash me ssages ................................................ ................................. ................ ................ ............... ....... 53 Multim edia messages (MMS) ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ............... . ...... 54 Instant message s (Chat) ................................ ................................. ................ ....................... ......... ...... 60 E-mail applicati on .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. .................... 70 Voice m essages ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................ ...... 74 Info message s... ................................ ................................. ................ .............................. .. ...................... 75 Service comm ands .......... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ...... 75 Deleting all messages from a folder ........................... ................................ ................ ................. ..... 75 Message settings ............. ................................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 76 Message counter ............. ................ ................................. ................................ .................. .................... 81 Call regi ster .......... ................................ ................ ................................. ....................... ......... ................ ...... 81 Recent calls lists .............................. ................................. ................ .............................. .. ...................... 81 Counters and timers for calls, data and mess ages . ................................ ................................ ...... 82 Cont acts ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ................ ...... 83 Selecting set tings for contac ts ... ................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... ...... 84 Saving name s and phone numb ers (Add contact) .................. ................................ ................ ...... 84 Saving multiple numbe rs or te xt items per name .................. ................ ................................ ...... 85 Adding an image to a name or number in contact s .............................. ................................ ...... 86 Searc hing for a contact ................. ................................. ................ ................................ ...... .......... ...... 87 Deleting contacts ............ ................................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 87 Editing o r dele ting d etails ............ ................................. ................................ ....................... ............... 88 My presence ...................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............. ................... ...... 89 Subscri bed names ........... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............. ...... 91 Copying c ontacts ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ...... 94 Sendin g and receiving a busine ss card ..... ................................. ................................ .................... .. 94
Con tents 7 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Speed dials ........................ ................ ................................. ................................ ........... ..... ...................... 95 Voice d ialling .... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ...... 96 Info numbe rs and service numbers ............ ................. ................................ ................................ .. .... 97 My numbers ...... ................ ................................ ................................. .............................. .................. ...... 98 Caller gro ups .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ................... ...... 98 Settin gs ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........... ................ ...... 99 Profiles ............... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ...... 99 Themes ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... ................... 100 Tone settin gs .... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................. ... ................... 100 Persona l shortcuts .......... ................ ................................. ................................ .................. ................. 101 Display setting s................ ................................ ................................. ................ .............. ................. .... 102 Time and date setting s .. ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ... 104 Call s ettings ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... ... 105 Phone settings ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ... 107 Connecti vity...... ................................ ................ ................................. ............................ .... ................ ... 109 Enhanc ement settings ... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ............ 112 Configur ation settings ................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... .............. 113 Security settings .............................. ................ ................................. ............................... ................. ... 115 Restore fa ctory s ettings ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ... 116 Operato r menu .................... ................................ ................. ................................ ............. ... ................... 116 Galle ry.................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................... ............................. ... 117 Me dia ..... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ................ ... 119 Camera ............... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ ... 119 Radio ... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 122 Voice re corder .................. ................................ ................. ................................ .............. ..................... 125 Orga niser ............... ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......................... ... 126 Alarm cl ock ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................ .................... ... 126 Calendar ............................. ................................ ................. ................................ ......... ....................... ... 127
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8 To-do list ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ......................... ....................... ... 130 Notes... ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ... 131 Synch ronisation ............................... ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 131 Appl ications ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ... 133 Game s and a pplications ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ........ ........... 133 Calculato r .......... ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................... 136 Countdow n tim er ............................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... ................ 138 Stopwa tch ......................... ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ... 138 Wallet . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 140 Service s.. ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................... 144 Basic steps for accessi ng and using services ........... ................ ................................ ................... 145 Settin g up the phone for a service .............................. ................................ ............................... . ... 145 Making a connec tion to a service .............. ................................. ................ ................................ ... 146 Browsi ng the pages of a service . ................................. ................................ ................ .............. ..... 147 Disconne ct from a service ............................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ... 148 Appea rance settings of the brow ser .......... ................................. ................................ .................. . 149 Cookies ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 149 Bookmark s ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................ .... ................... 150 Downlo ading .................... ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ... 151 Service inbox .... ................................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ................... 151 The cac he memory .......................... ................................. ................................ ................ .... ............... 153 Browse r security .............................. ................................. ................................ ................ ................... 153 SIM s ervices ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................... 156 7. PC Connectivity ................................................ ............................................ 158 PC S uite . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ................... 158 (E)GPRS, HSCSD and C SD ............. ................................. ................................ ................ ........... ........ 160 Using data communic ation a pplications ...................... ................ ................................ ................... 1 60
Con tents 9 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 8. Battery information............ ............................................................ .............. 161 Chargi ng and Disch arging................ ................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... ... 161 CARE AND MAINTENANCE.... ............................................................ .............. 163 ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION ................................................ .............. 165
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 FOR Y OUR SAF E TY Read thes e simple guid elin es. Not fo llowing th em may be dang erous or il legal . Read th e complete use r guide for further informat ion. SWI TCH ON S AF ELY Do no t sw itch th e phon e on w hen w ireles s phon e use i s prohi bited o r whe n it may cause inte rfer ence or da nger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all lo cal law s. Alwa ys keep your hands fr ee to opera te the vehicl e whil e driving . Your fi rst consi deration while dri ving shou ld be road sa fety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HOS PITALS Follow any res trictio ns. Swit ch the phone o ff near medica l equ ipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restri ctions. Wirel ess device s can cause inter ference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e phone a t a refu ell ing poin t. Don't use near fuel or chemica ls. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Follow a ny restri ctions. Do n't use the p hone whe re blas ting is in p rogres s.
FOR YOU R SAFETY 11 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. USE SEN SIB LY Use only in the normal posi tion a s expla ined i n the p rodu ct docum enta tion. D on't touch t he anten na unnece ssarily. QU ALIFIED S ERVICE Only quali fied per sonnel may ins tall or rep air this product. ENH ANC EME NTS AN D B ATT ERI E S Use only ap proved enhancemen ts an d batterie s. D o not connect in comp atible produ cts . WATER-RESISTA NCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up co pies or keep a wri tten recor d of all imp ortant informatio n stored in your pho ne. CONNECTING T O OT HER DEVICES When connecting to an y other device, read its user guide for d etailed safety instruct ions. Do not co nnect in compatible p roducts . EMER GEN CY CA LLS Ensure the phone is swit ched on and in service. Pres s as many ti mes as needed to cle ar the displa y and return to the st art screen. Key in the emergen cy number, then press . Give your lo cation . Do not end the ca ll until g iven perm is sion to do so .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 12 Gene ral information â Abou t you r devi ce The wi reless device des cribed in this gu ide is approved for use on the EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 net work. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and r espect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any f eatures in t his device, other than the alarm c lock, the devi ce must be swit ched on. Do not switch the devic e on when wireless device use may cause int erference or danger . Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts . Keep them out of the r each of small children. For availabilit y of approv ed enhancements, please check wit h your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. â Overv i ew of the fu nc tio ns of the ph one The Nokia 7260 phone provide s many functions that are pract ical for daily use, such a s a calenda r, a clock, an alarm c lock, and a built-in camera . The camera can be used for recording vide o clips and taking pictures that you can, for example, attach as wallpaper in standby mode or as thumbnail pictures in Contac ts . See
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 13 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Camera on page 11 9 . Personalis e your phone wit h themes. See Themes on page 100 . Your phone supports ⢠EDGE (Enh anced D ata rates for GSM Ev oluti on), s ee (E)G PRS on page 11 0 . ED G E is a radio interface modulation t echnique which increases GRPS dat a rates. ⢠A multimedia messaging service (MMS) and is able t o send and receive multimedia messages composed of text , a picture, a sound clip and a video clip. You can s ave the pict ures, ringing t ones or themes for per sonalising your phone. See Multimedia mes sages (MMS) on page 54 . ⢠xHTML br owser that ena bles you to ret rieve more colourful and richer graphical cont ent from web servers and t o view i t. See Services on page 144 . ⢠An e-mail application t o receive, read and send e -mails. See E-mail application on page 70 . ⢠Presence-enhanced contacts that enable s you to conv eniently share your availability information with y our colleagues, f amily and friends . See My presence on page 89 . ⢠Insta nt messages, which is a way of sending s hort text message s that are delivered ins tantly to online users. See I ns ta nt me ssag es (Ch at) on page 60 . ⢠Polyphonic s ound (MIDI) that consis ts of several sound compone nts played at the same time. The phone has sound components from over 128 i nstruments, but it c an play up to 16 instruments at t he same time. Polyphonic sounds are used in ringing tones and mes sage alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 14 ⢠Java 2 Micro Edition, J2ME TM , and inc ludes some Java applic ations and games that hav e been spec ially designed for mo bile phones. You can download new applications and games to your phone, see Applications on page 133 . Shar ed me mor y The phone has thr ee different memories. The following fe atures in this device may share t he first memo ry: contact s, text mess ages, instant mes sages and SMS e- mails, voice tags, calendar and notes. The second shared memory is used by multimedia messages, files stored in Gal lery and config uration settings. The t hird shared memor y is used by e- mail application, Java games and applications. U se of one or more of these features may r educe the memory availa ble for the remaining features sharing the same memory. F or example, sa ving many Ga llery items may use a ll of the av ailable memory in t he second memor y. Your device may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this cas e, delete so me of the info rmation or entrie s stored in the c orresponding shared memor y before cont inuing. â Nokia PC Suite soft ware With t he Nokia PC Suite software you can, for example, manage t he photos captured with the phoneâÂÂs camer a and handle ringing tones and wallpa pers. Nokia PC Suite is available on N okiaâÂÂs Web s ite at www .nokia.com.
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 15 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Acc ess c odes Security code (5 to 1 0 digits) The s ecurity code helps to protect your phone against unauthor ised use. The pre- set code is 12345. Change the code, and ke ep the new code secret an d in a safe place s eparate from your phone. To change the code, and to s et the phone t o request the code, s ee Se cur ity s etti ngs on page 11 5 . If y ou key in an incorrect securi ty code five times in succes sion, the p hone ignores further entries of the c ode. Wait f or 5 minutes and k ey in the code again. PIN and PIN2 co des (4 to 8 dig it s), Mod ule PIN and Sig ning PIN ⢠The PIN (Personal Identific ation Number) code helps to protect your SIM card against unaut horised use. The PIN code is usuall y supplied with t he SIM car d. Set the phone to request the PIN code ea ch t ime the phone is switched on, see Security settings on page 11 5 . ⢠The PIN 2 code may be supplied wit h the SIM car d and is required to access some funct ions, such as call counter s. ⢠The module PIN is required to access the information in t he security module. See Sec urity module on page 153 . The module PIN is supplied with t he SIM card if the SIM card has a security module i n it. ⢠The s igning PIN is require d for the digit al signature. See Digital s ignature on page 155 . The signing PIN is supplied with t he SIM card if the SIM card has a security module in it.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 16 If y ou key in an incor rect PIN code th ree times in succession, t he phone may display PIN blocked or PIN code blocked , fo r example, a nd ask y ou to enter the PUK code. PUK a nd PU K2 co de s ( 8 digi ts) The PUK (Per sonal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is r equired to change a bloc ked PIN2 code . If the codes are not supplied with t he SIM card, contact your local service provider for the codes . Barr ing pa ssw ord (4 d igi ts ) The barr ing password is required when using t he Call barring service , see Security settings on page 11 5 . You can obtain the pas sword from your service provide r. Wallet code ( 4 to 10 digit s) The wallet code is required to access the wallet services. If you key in an incorrect wallet code three times in succession, the wallet application is blocked f or 5 minutes. T he next thr ee incorrec t entries of t he code will double the time. For further inf orma tion, se e W allet on page 140 .
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 17 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Networ k servic es To us e the phone you mus t have service from a w ireless serv ice provider. Many of the featur es in this device de pend on features in the wireless network to function. These Network Services may not be a vailable on all networks or y ou may have to make s pecific ar rangements with y our service provider before you can utilize Network Ser vices. Your service provi der may need to give you additional instructions for their use and e xplain what ch arges will apply. Some networks may have limit ations that aff ect how you can use Networ k Services . For instance, s ome networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activat ed in your devic e. If so, t hey will not appe ar on your de vice menu. Cont act your service provider for more inf ormation. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols . Some features of this device , such as multimedia me ssages, e-mail applicat ion, instant messages, presence s ervice, Java game s and applicat ions and Internet se rvices requir e network suppor t for these t echnologies. Configur atio n settings ser vice To us e some of the net work servic es, such as mobile Internet services, MMS, Instant messages, E-Mail application, or Synchronisation, your phone needs the correc t configuration settings. You may rec eive the settings directly as a configuration mes sage and you need to sav e the settings on y our phone. T he service provider may provide a PIN that is nee ded to save the sett ings. For more information on t he availability of the settings, contact your network operator,
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 18 service provider, ne arest authorised Nokia dealer or visit the s upport area on t he Nokia website, www.nokia.com. . When you have receiv ed a conf iguration message Configuration sett. received is displaye d. To view the receiv ed settings, pr ess Show . ⢠To save the received setti ngs, press Save . If the phone asks Enter se ttings' PIN: , key in the PIN code for the set tings and press OK . Set these settings as the default or not. For ava ilability of t he PIN code , contact the s ervice pr ovider that supplies the settings. ⢠To dis card the r eceived set tings, press Di sca rd . To vie w and edit the settings see Configuration settings on page 11 3 . â Dow nlo ading co nt ent a nd appli cati ons You may b e able to download new content (for example images and video c lips) and applica tions into the phone (network servic e). 1. Select the download f unction for exa mple in the Collection and Gall ery menus. To ac cess the dow nload function, see t he respect ive menu des criptions. A list of bookma rks is s hown. Select More bookmarks i f y o u w a n t t o v i e w t h e bookmar ks available in t he Serv ices menu. 2. Select the bookmark of the brows er page that y ou want t o access. If t he connection f ails, change the active set of connection settings in t he Services menu and tr y the co nnection again. Follow the instruct ions provided by the servi ce.
Gene ra l in fo rmat i on 19 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. Your device may have s ome bookmark s loade d for site s not a ffilia ted with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endors e these sit es. If you ch oose to acces s them, you should take the sa me precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site. â Nok ia suppo rt on th e Web Check <www .nokia.com/suppor t> or your local Nokia We b site for t he latest version of this guide, addit ional information, downloads , and services related to your Nokia product.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 20 1. Gett ing starte d â Ins talling the SIM card a nd the ba tte ry Keep all SIM card s out of the re ach of small child ren. For ava ilab ility and info rmat ion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vend or. This may be the servi ce provider, netw ork op erat or, or other v endor . Before removing the co ver, always swi tch off the power and disconnect the charger and an y ot he r de v ic e. A l wa ys s tor e and u se th e dev ice wi th th e cov e rs a tt ac he d. 1. To remove the back cover of the phone: Push the bac k cover r elease button (1) and gently prise the back cover away from the phone beginning a t the bottom of t he phone (2). 2. Remove the bat tery by lif ting it as shown. Insert the SIM card into t he SIM card holder until it sn aps into position. Mak e su re th at the SIM c ard is properly inserted and that the golden cont act area on the card is facing downwards.
Gett ing st arte d 21 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To remove the SIM card pres s the car d release (1) and slide the SIM card towards the t op of the phone (2). 3. Rep lace th e ba tter y. O bserv e the con tac ts of the battery 4. Align the top of the back cover with the top of the phone (1), press the bottom of the b ack cover t o lock it (2).
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 22 â Ch arging th e bat tery Warn ing : Use o nly batteri es , charge rs, and enhanc ements ap proved by Nokia f or use with this particula r model. The use of any other types may inval idate any appro val or wa rranty, a nd may b e dange rous. Check the model number of a ny charger before use wit h this device. Th is device is intended for us e whe n supp lied wi th po wer from A C-1, A CP-7 , ACP-8, A CP-1 2, LCH-9 or LCH- 12 chargers. 1. Connect the lead from the charger to t he socket on the bottom of your phone. 2. Connect the charger to an AC wall s ocket. The t ext Charging is displayed briefly if t he phone is switche d on. If the battery is completely empt y, it ma y take a f ew minutes befor e the charging indicat or appears on t he display or be fore any c alls can be made. You can use t he phone while the charger is connecte d. The c harging time depends on the char ger and the ba ttery used. F or example , charging a ba ttery w ith the AC-1 or ACP-12 charger take s approximately 1 hour and 20 minut es while the phone is in sta ndby mode.
Gett ing st arte d 23 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Swi tc hi ng th e pho ne on an d o ff Warn ing : Do not sw itch the p hone on whe n wire less p hone use is p rohibi ted o r when it may ca use interferenc e or da nger. Press and hold the power key as shown. Note that if the phone displays Insert SIM c ard even though the SIM card is properly ins erted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network ope rator or service provider. Your phone does not s upport 5-Volt SIM cards and the c ard may need to be changed. ⢠If th e phone as ks for a PIN code, key in the PIN code (for example, displayed as * ***), and press OK . See also PIN code request in Security settings on page 11 5 and Access codes on page 15 . ⢠If t he phone as ks for a s ecurity code, key in the s ecurity c ode (for example , display ed as ** ***), and press OK . See als o Access codes on page 15 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 24 â Normal operati ng position Your phone h as an intern al ante nna. Us e the phone only i n its norma l oper ating posi tion a s show n. Note: As wi th an y other radio t ransm itting devi ce, do not touc h the anten na unnece ssarily whe n the d evice is switched on. Conta ct with the antenna affects call quali ty and ma y cau se th e dev ic e to op era t e at a hi gh er p ow er level th an otherwis e need ed. Avo iding co ntact with the ant enna a rea wh en op eratin g the devic e opti mise s the antenna performance a nd the battery life.
Gett ing st arte d 25 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Put ting on a wrist s trap There a two eyele ts to at tach the wris t strap: ⢠At t he lower left side near the ke y . ⢠At t he upper right edge . Thread t he strap as shown i n the pict ure and tighten it.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 26 2. Y our phone â Key s an d co nn e cto rs 1. Power key Switches the phone on and off. When the keypad is locked, pressing the power key briefly t urns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on for approximately 15 seconds. 2. Earpiece 3. Loudspeaker 4. Volume keys 5. Selection keys and , middle selection key The funct ion of thes e keys depends on the guiding text shown on the display above the keys. See Standby mode on page 28 . 6. 5-way joyst ick Enables scrolling through names, phon e numbers, menus or settings. The 5- way joy stick is also used to move the cursor up and down, and left and right when writ ing text, us ing the calendar , and in some game applications. Moving
You r phone 27 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. the joystick als o functions as t he middle se lection key, and pressing it briefly selec ts the function s hown on the di splay above the joystic k. In standby mode, the joy stick functions as a shortc ut. Move the joy stick ⢠right to acce ss the cale nda r. ⢠left t o start writ ing an SMS message. ⢠up t o ac tiv ate the cam era. ⢠down t o access th e list of cont acts. 7. dial s a phone number, and answers a call. In s tandby mode, it shows the list of the most recently called numbers. 8. ends an active call. Exits from any f unction. 9. - enter numbers and characters. and are us ed for various purposes in di fferent functions. 10. Charger c onnector 11. Pop -Port TM connector used, f or example, f or headsets and t he data cable.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 28 12. Infrared (IR) port 13. Came ra lens â Sta n dby mo de When the phone is ready f or use, and you have not keyed in any character s, the phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows the name of the network or t he operator logo t o indicat e in which ce llular network t he phone is currently being used. 2. Shows the signal strength of t he cellular network at your current loc ation. The higher the bar, t he stronger the signal. 3. Shows the battery charge level. T he higher the ba r, the more power in the battery 4. The left selection k ey in standby mode is Go t o . Press Go to to view the f unctions in your per sonal shortcut list. Select a function to ac tivate it.
You r phone 29 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Option s and sele ct ⢠Select 'Go to' opti ons to view t he list of available funct ions that you can add. Scroll t o the desired f unction and press Mar k to add it to the shortcut list. To remove a function f rom the list, press Un mark . ⢠Organise 'Go to' options to rearrange the functions on your pers onal shortcut list. Sel ect the desired function and press Mo ve , then select whe re you want t o move the function. See als o Go to options on page 102 . 5. The middle selection key in standby mode is Menu . 6. The right s election key in standby mode is Names t o acce ss the Contacts menu or another s hortcut to a function you c an select. Se e P e rsonal shortcuts on page 101 . Or the key has an operator-specifi c name t o access an operator- specific web sit e. See als o Essential indicators on page 30 . Wallpa per You can s et your phone to display a background picture, wallpaper, when the phone is in standby mode. See Display s ettings on page 10 2 . Scr e en s a ve r You can s et your phone to display a screen saver, when the phone is in standby mode. See Display settings on page 102 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 30 Power s aving For power saving, a digital clock view overwrites the display when no phone function has been us ed for a certain per iod of time. Press any ke y to deactiv ate the s creen s aver. If you have not set the time , 00:00 is displayed. To set t he time, see Time and date settings on page 104 . In addit ion you can set a s creen saver from Gallery . See Display set tings on page 102 . Essent ial in dicat ors You have receiv ed one or se veral text, pic ture messages or multimedia messages. See Reading and replying to an SMS message or an SM S e-mail on page 51 or Rea ding and replying to a mult imedia message on page 58 . The phone has registered a missed call. See Call register on page 81 . or Your phone is c onnected to t he instant mess ages service and the availability st atus is o nline or offline, r espectively . See Connecting t o and disconnecting fr om the instant mes saging service on page 63 . You have received one or se veral instant messages and you are connected to the ins tant messages s ervice. See Connecting to and dis connecting from the instant mes saging service on pa ge 63 . The phoneâÂÂs keypad is lock ed. See Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32 .
You r phone 31 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The phone does not ring for an incoming ca ll or text mes sage when Incoming call alert is s et to Off and Mes sage alert t one is set to Off . See Tone s ettings on page 100 . The alarm cloc k is s et to On . See Alarm clock on page 126 . The countdown timer is running. See Countdown timer on page 138 . The stopwatch is running in t he background. See Stopwatch on page 13 8 . When the (E)G PRS connection mode Always online is s elected and t he (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the t op left of t he display. Refer t o (E)GPRS connection on page 111 . When the (E)G PRS connection is es tablished, the indicat or is s hown on the top lef t of the dis play. Refe r to (E)GPRS connection on page 11 1 and Browsing the pages of a service on page 147 . The (E)GPRS connect ion is suspended (on hold), for exa mple if there is an incoming or outgoing call du ring the (E)G PRS dial-up connection. The indicator is show n on the top r ight of the dis play. Infrared connection indicator, see Infrared on page 10 9 . All your calls are diverted to a nother number, Div ert all voice calls . If y o u have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the f irst line is and for the second line . See Ca ll setti ngs on page 10 5 . or If you have two phone lines, the indicat or displays the se lected phone line. See Call settings on page 10 5 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 32 The loudspea ker has been activated, s ee Options during a call on page 36 . Calls are limited t o a clos ed user group. See Security s ettings on page 11 5 . The timed pr ofile is se lected. See Pr ofiles on page 99 . , , or A headset, handsfree, loopset or music stand is c onnected to the phone. To s et the phone to s how the time and date in standby mode, s ee Time and date settings on page 10 4 . â Key pad lock (Key guard ) You can lo ck the keypad to prevent the ke ys being ac cidentally pres sed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. ⢠Loc ki ng t h e k e ypa d In standby mode, press Me nu and then within 1.5 s econds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unloc k and then wit hin 1.5 seconds. To ans wer a call w hen the ke yguard is on, pr ess . During a ca ll, the phone can be operat ed normally. W hen you end or reject the call, the keypad will automatically be locked. For Automatic keyguard , see Phone se ttings on page 10 7 . For locking the keypad during a call, see Options during a call on page 36 .
You r phone 33 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. When the keypad lock is on, calls stil l may be possi ble to the offici al emerge ncy number programmed in to your de vice.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 34 3. Ca ll funct ion s â Mak in g a c al l 1. Key in the phone number, i ncluding the ar ea code. If you key in an incorrect char acter, press Clear to delete it. For inte rnational calls, pr ess twice for the internat ional prefix (the charact er replaces t he internati onal access code ) and then k ey in the count ry code, the area code without the leading 0, if nece ssary, and the phone number. 2. Press to call the number. 3. Press to end the call or to cancel t he call att empt. See als o Options during a call on page 36 . Making a call using the contacts To s earch for a name/phone number that you have saved in Contact s , see Searching f or a contact on page 87 . Press to call the number. Last number redialling In standby mode, press once to acc ess the list of up to 20 numbe rs you last called or attempted to c all. Scroll to the number or name that you want, and pre ss to call the number. Calling your voice mailbox In standby mode, press a nd hold , or press and .
Call fu ncti on s 35 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If the phone asks f or the voice mailbox number, key it in and press OK . See also Voice messages on page 74 . Speed diallin g a phon e number Before you can use spee d dialling, assign a phone number to one of the spe ed- dialling keys , from to , see Speed dials on page 95 . C all the number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the speed-dialling key that you want and t hen press . â¢I f Speed dialling is set to on, pr ess and hold a speed-dialling key until the call is started. See Call settings on page 105 . â Answ eri n g or r eje ct in g an inco mi n g ca ll Press t o answer an inc oming call and pr ess to end the call. Press to re ject an incoming call. If you press Silence , only the ringing tone is muted. Then eit her answer or r eject the call. If a compatible headset supplied with the headset key is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the key. Tip: If the Diver t if busy f unction is acti vated to div ert the calls , for example t o your voice ma ilbox, rejecting an incoming call will also div ert the ca ll. See Call s ettings on page 10 5 . Note t hat when somebody is calling y ou, the phone shows the c allerâÂÂs name, phone number or the text Private number or Call . If more than one name is found
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 36 in Contacts wit h the same la st seven digit s of the phone number as the callerâÂÂs number, only t he phone number wi ll be displaye d, if this is available. The phone may dis play an incorr ect name, if the cal lerâÂÂs number is not saved in Contacts but there i s another name saved with the same last eight digits in the phone number as in the phone number of t he caller. Ca ll wa iti ng During a c all, press to answer the waiting c all. The first call is put on hold. Pres s to end the active call. To ac tiva te the Call waiting function, s ee Call sett ings on page 105 . â Options d urin g a ca ll Many of t he options that y ou can use during a cal l are network services. For availability, contact your network operator or ser vice provider. Press Option s during a call for some of the following opt ions: ⢠Mute or Unmute , Contacts , Menu , Reco rd , and the net work service s Answer and Reje ct , Hold or Unhold , New call , End call , End all calls . ⢠Lock k eypad to act ivate th e keypad l ock. ⢠Send DTMF to send DTMF (Dual Tone Mult i-Frequency) t one strings, for example, password s or bank account numbers ( network service). The DTMF system is used by all touch-tone telephones . Key in the D TMF string or s earch for it in Cont ac ts and press DTMF . Not e that you c an ke y in the wait char acter w and th e pause char acter p by repeatedly pressing .
Call fu ncti on s 37 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and disconnect yourself from both calls (network s ervi ces). ⢠Confer ence to call another par ty and invite them into t he call (network servi ce) . ⢠Priv ate call to have a private conversation with one participant in a conference call (networ k service). ⢠Auto volume on or Auto volume off . Automatic volume controls the ea rpiece volume lev el according to t he environment nois e level. ⢠Loudspeaker to use the integrated loudspeaker during a call to have the handsfree function of your phone. Note : Do not hold t he device near your e ar when the loudspeaker is in use, beca use the volume ma y be extremely loud. To ac tivate/deactivate the loudspeaker , select Loudspeaker / Handset or press Lou d sp . / Normal . The loudspeaker is automatically deactivated when you end the call or call att empt or connec t the handsfree unit or headset t o the phone. If you have connected a compatible handsfree unit or the headset t o the phone, Handset in the options list is replaced with Handsf ree or H eadset and the selection key Normal with Hands f. or Head s. , re s pe ct i vel y . Using t he loudspeaker w ith the radio, see Using the radio on page 123 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 38 4. Wr it ing t ext You can k ey in text, for example, when writing messages, using tradit ional or predictiv e text input. When you are writing text , predi ctive text input is indicated by and traditional t ext input by at the top left of the display. T he charac ter case is indicat ed by , , or next to t he text input indicator. You can change t he charact er case by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you c an change bet ween the letter and number mode by pressing and holding . â Set ting pre dicti ve te xt in put on or off When writing text, press O ptions and se lect Dictionary . ⢠To s et predictive t ext input on, select a la nguage in the dictionary options list. Predictiv e text input is only available for the languages on the lis t. ⢠To r evert to t raditional text input, select Dictionary of f . Tip: To quick ly set pr edictive tex t input on or off when writing t ext, press twice, or press and hold Options . â Us ing pre dictiv e text input You can key in any letter with a single keypress. Predict ive text input is bas ed on a built-in dictionary to whic h you can als o add new w ords.
Writ ing te xt 39 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 1. Start writing a w ord using the keys to . Pr ess each key only once for a single letter. The word changes after each keystroke. Example: To write Nokia w hen the Englis h dictionary i s selected, press , , , an d . For mor e instructions on writing text, see Tips for writ ing text on pa ge 40 . 2. When you have finished writ ing the word and it is correct, confirm it by adding a spa ce with or by moving the joy stick up, down, left or right. Moving the joystick als o moves the c ursor. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly or press Options an d s el e c t Matches . When the w ord that you want appears, confirm it. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the wor d you intended to write is not in the dictionary. T o add the word to t he dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (traditional t ext input is us ed) and press Save . When the dictionary becomes full, the new word replac es the oldest one that was added. 3. Start writing the next word. Writing com pound word s Key in the first part of the word and move the joystick to the r ight, then write the last par t of the wor d. â Us ing tra ditio nal t ext inpu t Press a number key, to , r epeatedly unti l the desire d character appears. Not all char acters available under a number key are printed on the k ey.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 40 The c haracters ava ilable depend on the l anguage select ed in the Phone language menu, s ee Phone s ettings on page 10 7 . ⢠If t he next let ter you want is locate d on the same k ey as the present one, wait until the cursor appea rs, or move the joy stick up, down, left or right and then key in the lette r. ⢠The most common punctuation marks and special characters are available under the number key . For mor e instructions on writing text , see Tips for wr iting text on pa ge 40 . â Tips for wri ting te xt The following functions may also be av ailable for writing t ext: ⢠To ins ert a space, press . ⢠Move the cursor to the left, right, down or up with the joystick. ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, press and hold the desir ed number key. ⢠To dele te a cha racter to the left o f the cursor, pr ess Cle a r . Press and hold Clear to de lete the charac ters more quick ly. To dele te all the c haracters at once when writing a message , press Options and sel ect Clear text . ⢠To ins ert a word whe n using predict ive text input, p ress Options and select Insert wor d . Write the word using traditional text input and press Save . T he word is also added to the dictionary.
Writ ing te xt 41 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠To ins ert a special c haracter when us ing traditional t ext input, press , or when us ing predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options an d sel ect Insert sy mbol . Use t he joystick to scroll to a charact er and pre ss Use to sele ct the charac ter. You can a lso scroll to a charact er by press ing , , or , and selec t the character by pr essing . ⢠To ins ert a smiley whe n using traditional t ext input, p ress t wice, or whe n using predic tive text input , press and hold and press again, or press Options and select Insert smiley . Use t he joystick to scroll to a smiley and press Use to select the smiley. You can a lso scroll to a charact er by press ing , , or , and selec t the character by pr essing . The following options are available when w riting text me ssages: ⢠To ins ert a number while in letter mode, press Options and select Insert number . Key in the phone number or s earch for it in Contacts and press OK . ⢠To ins ert a name from Contacts , pr ess Options and select Insert contact . To insert a phone number or a text item attached t o the name, pr ess Options and sel ect View details .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 42 5. Using the menu The phone offers you an extensive r ange of fu nctions, which are grouped into menus. Most of the menu funct ions are pr ovided with a br ief help t ext. To view the help text, scr oll to the menu function you wa nt and wait for 15 seconds. T o exit the help text, press Back . See Phone settings on page 107 . â Acce ssin g a me nu fu nc tio n 1. To ac cess the menu, press Menu . 2. Use t he joystick to scroll thr ough the menu and select, for example, Se ttings by pressing Selec t . To change the menu v iew, see Menu view in Display settings on page 102 . 3. If the menu cont ains submenus, select the one that you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected s ubmenu contains furthe r submenus, repeat step 3. Select the next submenu, for example A nykey answer . 5. Select the setting of your choice . 6. Press Back to retur n to the previous menu level, and Exit to exi t the menu .
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 43 â Lis t of me nu fu nctio ns ⢠Messages 1. Create message 1. Text message 2. Multimedia ms g. 3. Flash mes sage 2. Inbox 3. O utbox 4. Sent items 5. Saved items 1. Text messages 2. Multimedia ms gs. 6. Instan t mess age s 1. L ogin 2. Save d convers. 3. Connect. s ettings 7. E-mail 1 1. Create e-ma il 2. Retrieve 3. Disc onnect 4. Inbox 5. Other f olders 8. V oice me ssages 1. Lis ten to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox number 9. I nfo messages 1. In fo se rv ic e 2. T opics 3. La nguage 4. Info topics saved on SIM card 5. Re ad 2 10.Service c ommands 11.Delete messages 12.Message settings 1. Text me ssages 2. Multimedia msgs. 3. E-mail messages 4. Other s etti ngs 1. In so me co untrie s thi s func tion m ay no t be a vailabl e. 2. This me nu i s s hown only if an y inf o me ssag e s ar e re c eive d.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 44 ⢠Call register 1. Missed calls 2. Receive d calls 3. Dialled number s 4. Delete recent ca ll lists 1. All 2. Mis sed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call durat ion 1. Last call duration 2. Receiv ed calls' duration 3. Dialled c alls' duration 4. All ca lls' duration 5. Clear timers 6. GPRS data counter 1. Data sent in last session 2. D ata received in las t session 3. All s ent data 4. All recei ved data 5. Clear counters 7. G PRS connection timer 1. Duration of las t session 2. Duration of all sessions 3. Clear timers ⢠Contacts 1. Search 2. A dd new contact 3. Delete 4. M y presence 5. Su bscribed names 6. Copy 7. Settings 1. Memory in us e 2. Co nt ac ts vi ew 3. Memory s tatus 8. Speed dials 9. V oice t ags 10.Info numbers 1 11.Service numbe rs 1 12.My numbers 2 13.Caller groups 2 1. Shown i f su ppor te d by yo ur S I M card. For av ail abil ity , c ont act y ou r net work oper ato r or ser v- ice provi der . 2. If Info num bers, Serv ice nu mbers o r both a re not s upporte d, the nu mber of this m enu item chang es a ccor di ngl y.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 45 ⢠Settings 1. Pr ofiles 1. General 2. Silent 3. Meeting 4. Outdoor 5. My style 1 6. My style 2 2. Themes 1. Selec t theme 2. Theme downloads 3. Tone settings 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ringing tone 3. Ringing volume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Mess age alert tone 6. Instant message alert tone 7. Keypad tones 8. Warning tones 9. Alert for 4. Pe rsonal shortcut s 1. Right selection key 2. Selec t 'Go t o' options 3. Organise 'Go to' options 4. Voice commands 5. D isplay settings 1. W allpaper 2. Scr een saver 3. Colour schemes 4. Menu view 5. Operator logo 6. T ime and date s ettings 1. Clock 2. Da te 3. Auto-update of date & time 7. C all settings 1. Automatic volume control 2. Call dive rt 3. A nykey answer 4. Automatic redial 5. Speed d ialling 6. Call wait ing 7. Summar y after call 8. Send my caller ID 9. Line for outgoing calls 1 8. Ph one settings 1. Phone language 2. A utomatic keyguard 3. Cell info dis play 1. For av ail abi lity , conta ct your netw ork o pe rat or or ser vice prov ide r.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 46 4. Welcome note 5. O perator selection 6. Confirm SIM service actions 7. He lp text activat ion 8. Start-up tone 9. Conn ectivity 1. Infr ared 2. GPR S 10.Enhancement settings 1 1. H eadset 2. H andsfree 3. Loopset 11.Configuration settings 1. Default configuration settings 2. Act ivate default in all applications 3. Pref erred access point 4. Pe rsonal configurat ion settings 12.Security settings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barr ing service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed user group 5. Secur ity level 6. A ccess codes 13.Restore factory s ettings â¢O p e r a t o r m e n u 2 ⢠Gallery 1. Images 2. V ideo clips 3. Themes 4. Graphics 5. Tones 6. Recordings â¢M e d i a 1. Camera 2. Radio 3. V oice r ecorder 1. Thi s me nu is sh own only if t he p hone is o r h as bee n c onne cted t o a com pati ble e nhan ceme nt ava ilable for the phon e. 2. If thi s men u is n ot sho wn t he s ubsequ ent m enu numb ers c hanges acco rdingly . The nam e de - pends o n th e net work op era tor.
Us ing th e men u Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 47 â¢O r g a n i s e r 1. Alarm clock 1. Alarm t ime 2. Repeat alarm 3. Alarm tone 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 4. N otes 5. Synchronisation ⢠Applications 1. G ames 1. Selec t game 2. Game downloa ds 3. Memory 4. App. s ettings 2. Collection 1. Selec t application 2. App. dow nloads 3. Memory 3. Extras 1. Calculator 2. Countdown t imer 3. Stopwatch 4. W allet ⢠Service s 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. D ownload links 1. Tone downloads 2. Graphic downloads 3. Game downloads 4. Video downlo ads 5. Theme downloads 6. App. downloads 4. L ast web addr . 5. Ser vice inbox 6. Settings 1. Configuration settings 2. Appear ance settings 3. Secur ity settings 4. Service inbox settings 7. G o to address 8. C lear the cache ⢠SIM services 1 1. Only show n if su pport ed by yo ur S I M card . Th e n ame a nd c ont ents var y de pen ding on t he SIM card.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 48 6. Menu functions â Messa ges The mes sage services can only be used if they are supported by your net work or yo ur service pr ovider. You can read, write, s end and save t ext, multimedia and SMS e-mail me ssages (network se rvices). All message s are organised into folders. To s elect the font size for reading and writing mes sages, pres s Menu , and select Messages , M essage settings , Oth er se tt ing s and Font size . Not e: When sendi ng message s, your phone ma y display the words Me s sag e s e nt . This is a n indicatio n that th e messag e has been sen t by your de vice to the mes sage centre number p rogrammed i nto your device. This is not an indica tion that th e messag e has been rec eived at the intende d destin ation. Fo r more details about messag ing servic es, check with your service provid er. Tex t m ess ag e s (S MS) Using t he SMS (Short Message Servic e) your phone can send and receiv e multi- part messages, which consist of several ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing may be based on t he number of ordinar y messages that are r equired for a multi-part message. This may affect the invoicing for the message. Before y ou can send a mes sage, you need to save some message settings. See Settings for text and SMS e-mail messages on page 76 .
Menu func t ions 49 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. You can a lso send and receive t ext messages that contain pictures. A pic ture message c an be a mult i-part message. Not e: Only device s th at offer pictu re me ssage featu res ca n receive an d dis play pictur e mess ages . The t ext messages funct ion uses shar ed memory, s ee Shared memory on page 14 . Writin g and s ending messa ges Your d evice support s the sending of t ext messag es beyond the norma l 160-char acter limit. If yo ur m ess age exc eed s 1 60 ch ar acte rs, it w ill be s ent as a ser ies of tw o o r mo re m ess ages . The num ber of available cha racters / the current part number of a mu lti-part message are show n on the top rig ht of th e displa y, for examp le 120/2. Note that usi ng speci al (Unic ode) ch ara cter s suc h as ë , â, á, ì tak e up mor e sp ace . 1. Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Text message . Tip: To star t writing mess ages quickly, mov e the joy stick to the left in standby mode. 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38 . To ins ert text templat es or a picture into the message, see T emplates on page 52 . Each picture message comprises several text messages. Therefore, s ending one pict ure message, as well as other multipart messages may cost more than sending one text message. 3. To s end the message, pres s Sen d or . The mes sages that you have sent will be s aved in th e Sent items f older if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for text and SMS e-ma il messages on page 76 . Text messages ar e indicated wit h .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 50 4. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or sear ch for the phone number in Contacts . Press OK to send the m essa ge. Options for sendin g a mes sag e After you have w ritten a message, press Options and select Sending options . ⢠To s end a message t o several recipients, select Send to many . When you have sent t he message to eve ryone you want to send it to, press Done . Note that a separate mes sage is se nt to each of t he recipients. ⢠To s end a message as an SMS e-mail (network s ervice), selec t Send as e-mail . Key in the recipient âÂÂs e-mail addr ess or search f or it in Contacts and press OK . If you wis h, you can key in a s ubject for the SMS e-mail a nd press OK . Key in the e-mail message. See Writing te xt on page 38 . The total number of charact ers that you can key in is shown o n the top right of the displa y. The e- mail addres s and subject are included in t he total number of characters. See als o T emplates on page 52 . Pict ures cannot be ins erted. To send t he SMS e-mail, press Send . If you have not saved t he settings for sending SMS e-mails, the phone asks for the numbe r of the e-mai l server. Press OK to send t he e-mail. ⢠To s end a message using a message profile, select Sending profile and the n the desired me ssage profile. To define a message profile, s ee Settings for text and SMS e-mail messages on page 76 .
Menu func t ions 51 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Reading and r eplyi ng to an SM S messag e or a n SMS e-ma il When you have receiv ed a message or an SMS e- mail, the indic ator and the number of new messages followed by messages received ar e shown. The blink ing indicates t hat the message me mory is f ull. Before you can receive new mes sages, delet e some of yo ur old messages in the Inbox folder. 1. Press Show to vie w the new mes sage, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message late r: Press Menu , and select Messages and Inbox . 2. If more than one messag e has been received, se lect the one that you want to read. An unread t ext messa ge or SMS e-mail is indic ated by . Options while reading the message: Press Option s and sele ct an option, for example, to delete, fo rward or edit t he message as a text message or a n SMS e-mail, rename the message you are reading or to move it to another f older. Select Copy to cale ndar t o copy text at t he beginning of the message to your phoneâÂÂs calendar as a reminder note for the current day. Select Message details t o view, if av ailable, the senderâÂÂs name and phone number, the message centre used, and t he date and time of receipt. Select Use detail to extract numbers, e-mail addresses and website addresses from the c urrent message . Tip: While reading a message , press the key t o extract number s, e- mail address es and website addr esses from the current message.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 52 When reading a picture message, selec t Save picture to sav e th e pictu re in the Templates f older. 3. Select Reply and t he message ty pe to reply to a messa ge. When replying to an SMS e-mail, confirm or edit the e- mail address and subject f irst. Th en write y our reply messa ge. 4. To s end the message, pres s Sen d , and press OK to send the mess age to the displaye d number. Inbox and sen t it ems fo lder s The phone saves incoming t ext and multimedi a messages in the Inbox folder. Sent text messages are saved in th e Sent items f older. Text mes sages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Saved text msgs. , My folders or Templat es folder. Templat es Your phone includes text t emplates, indicated by , and picture templates, indicat ed by . To ac cess the t emplate list , press Menu , and s elect Messages , Saved items , T ext messages and Templates . ⢠To ins ert a text template into t he message or t he SMS e-mail that you are writing or replying to, pres s Options . Select Use templat e and select the template that you want t o insert. ⢠To ins ert a pictur e into the text message t hat you are writing or re plying to, press Option s . Select Insert picture and select a pic ture to v iew it. Pre ss Insert
Menu func t ions 53 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. to inser t the pictur e into your me ssage. The indicator in t he header of the message indic ates that a pic ture has been attached. The number of characters that you can enter in a messa ge depends on the size of th e picture. To vie w the text and the pict ure togethe r before sending the message, press Options and select Preview . Saved it ems folder and My f old er s To organise your messages, you c an move some of t hem to the Saved items folder, or add new folders f or your me ssages. While reading a message, pr ess Options . Select Mov e , scroll to t he folder that you want to move the message to and press Select . To add or delete a folder, press Menu , and select Messages , Saved items , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder if you have not saved any folder, press Add . Otherwise, press Options and select Add f older . ⢠To dele te a folder, s croll to the f older that you want t o delete, pre ss O ptions and se lect Delete folder . Flash messages Flash messages are t ext message s that are displayed instant ly. Writin g a fl as h message Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Flash message . For further opera tion, see Writing and sending messages on page 49 . The maximum length of
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 54 a flash message is 70 characters. To insert a blinking te xt into the message, select Insert blink char . from the opt ions list to set a marker. The text behind t he marker blinks until a second marker is inserted. Not e: Only devices that offer compat ible flash message features can receive and displ ay blinking flash mess ages. Receiv in g a flas h mess age A received flash mess age is not automati cally save d. To read th e message, pres s Read . Press Options and select Us e detail to extract phone numbers, e -mail addresse s and website addresses from the current message. To s ave the mess age, press Save and select t he folder in w hich you want to save the message. Multimedia mess ages (MMS) Not e: Onl y device s that offer compatib le mu ltimedi a message feat ures c an receive and disp lay multime dia mes sages. A multimedia message can contain text, sound and a picture or a video clip. The phone supports multimedia messages t hat are up to 100 KB in size. If the maximum s ize is exceeded, the phone may not be able to rec eive the message. Dependi ng on the network, you ma y receive a text message t hat include s an Internet addr ess where you can v iew the multimedia message. If the message contains a picture in compatible f ormat, the phone may scale it down t o fit the displa y area. The multimedia message funct ion uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 .
Menu func t ions 55 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If Allow multimedia recept ion is se t to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may cha rge you for every mes sage you receiv e. The default set ting to rec eive multimedia mes sages is generally on. See Settings for mult imedia messages on page 77 . Multimedia messaging supports the f ollowing formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BMP and PNG. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI), AMR audio and monophonic ringing tones. ⢠Video clips in 3gp f ormat with SubQCIF and QCIF resolution and AMR audio. The phone does not necessarily support all variations of the aforementioned file formats. If a rece ived message cont ains any unsupported elements, t hey may be replaced w ith the file name and t he text Object format not supported . Note t hat you are not able to r eceive any mult imedia messages if you have a call in progress, or a game or another Java application running. Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of r easons, do not rely solely upon t hem for esse ntial communications. Writ ing an d sendi ng a mu ltim edia mess age To set the settings f or multimedia messaging, see Settings for multi media messages on page 77 . T o chec k availabilit y and to subs cribe to th e multimedia messaging s ervice, cont act your ne twork operator or service provider. Copyright protect ions may prev ent some images, ringing tones and ot her content from bei ng copied, modified, t ransferred or f orwarded. 1. Press Menu , and select Messages , Create message and Mult imedia msg. .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 56 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38 . ⢠To ins ert a file in the message, press Options , select Inse rt and select the desired option. You cannot s elect an option if it is dimmed. The list of available folder s in the Gallery is shown. Open a specific folder, scroll to the desired file, press Options and select Insert . An attached file is indicated with the file name in the message . Please note that you cannot insert a theme in a new message. To move the text component to the t op or bottom of the me ssage, press Options and select Place t ext first or Place text la st . ⢠Your phone supports the sending and receiving of multimedia mess ages that cont ain several pages (slides). To ins ert a slide in t he message, pr ess Options , and select Insert and Slide . Each slide ca n contain text , one image and one s ound clip. If the message contains s everal slides , you can open the des ired one by pressing O ptions and select ing Previous slide , Next slide or Slide list . To change the time a slide will be displayed in a slide pres entation select the slide, press Options and select Slide t iming . To change the default value see Default slide timing in Sett ings for multimedia messages on page 77 . ⢠To ins ert a name from the contacts lis t, press Options and select More options , Ins ert contact and the des ired name. To ins ert a number from t he contacts list, press Options and select More options and Ins ert number .
Menu func t ions 57 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠To ins ert a cale ndar note, press Options and select Insert and Calendar note . ⢠To ins ert a business car d, press Options an d se le ct Insert and B usin ess card . ⢠To de lete an image, s lide or s ound clip fr om the message, press Opti ons and sel ect Dele te and the des ired function. ⢠To save the message in the Saved items folder , press Op ti ons and select Save mes sage . ⢠To a dd a subject to the mess age, press Options and select More options and Edit subject . ⢠To view for example t he size or recipient of the message, press Options and sel ect More options and Message details . 3. To vie w the messa ge or slide pres entation before sending it, press Options and sel ect Preview . 4. T o se nd the mess age , p ress Send , or pr ess Options and select Send to e-mail or Send to many . 5. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number (or e-mail addr ess) or search for it in Contacts . Press OK and the message is moved to t he Outbox folder for s ending. It take s more time to send a multimedia message than t o send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated indicator is displaye d and you can use other functions on the phone. If there is an interruption w hile the message is being sent, the phone t ries to resend it a f ew times. If t his fails, the mes sage will remain in the Outbox folder and you can tr y to resend it later.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 58 The mes sages that you have sent will be s aved in th e Sent items f older if the setting Save sent messages is s et to Yes . See Settings for multimedia mes sages on page 77 . Multimedia mes sages are indicat ed with . Readin g an d repl yin g to a m ult ime dia me ssage Imp ortan t: Multi media mess age obje cts may contain viruses o r otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. Do not o pen any attachme nt if you are not sure o f the trustwo rthines s of the se nder. When your phone is rece iving a multimedi a message, t he animated indicat or is displayed. When t he message has been received, the indicator and the text Multimedia message received are shown. The blink ing indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, s ee Multimedia messages memory full on page 60 . The appearance o f a multim edia messa ge may vary depending on the receivi ng device. 1. Press Show to vie w the message, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Pres s Men u , and select Messages and Inbox . An unread multime dia message is indicated by . 2. Scrol l to view t he message. Pr ess Options and, for example, some of the following options may be available. ⢠Play pr esentation to view th e presentation a ttached in the mes sage. ⢠View t ext to view only the text in the message. ⢠Open image , Open sound clip or Open video clip to open the corresponding file.
Menu func t ions 59 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Save image , Save sound clip or Save video clip to s ave the co rresponding file in the Gallery . ⢠Details to view the details of t he attached file. ⢠Delete me ssage to delete a s aved message. ⢠Reply or Reply to all to reply to t he mess age. To send t he reply, pr ess Options and select Send . ⢠Forward to no. , Forward to e-mail or Forward t o many to for war d th e message. ⢠Edit to edit a message. You c an only edit messages y ou have creat ed. See Writing and s ending a multimedia mes sage on page 55 . ⢠Message deta ils to view t he subject , size and t he type of message. ⢠Refer a lso to the options in Gallery , see Gallery on page 11 7 . Inbox, Outb ox, Sav ed and Sent it ems fo lder s The phone saves the multimedia messages t hat have been received in the Inbox folder. Multimedia messages that have not yet been s ent are moved to the Outbox folder. The multimedia messages that you wish to send later can be s aved in the Saved items folder. The multimedia mes sages that have been sent a re saved in the Sent items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for multimedia messages on page 77 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 60 Mult imed ia me ssa ges me mory full When you have a ne w multimedia mess age waiting and t he memory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, v iew waiting msg. is shown. To view t he waiting message, press Show . To save the message, pr ess Options , select Save message and delete old messages b y first selecting the folder and t hen the oId message to be delet ed. To dis card the wa iting message, press Exit and Yes . If you pr ess No , you can view the message. Insta nt m ess age s (Ch a t) Instant messaging (Chat) is a way of sending s hort, simple text me ssages that are delivered ov er TCP/IP protocols to online user s (network service). Your contact lis t shows you when the c ontacts on the l ist are online and available to participate in an instant messages convers ation. When you have written and sent your message, it st ays on the dis play. The reply message appear s below your original messa ge. Before y ou can use instant messaging, you need to subs cribe to the service. For availability, char ging and s ubscription to the service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you also rece ive your unique ID and passwor d and the settings for ins tant messaging. For s etting the re quired settings for th e instant mess aging service, see Instant messaging settings on page 69 . The icons and texts on the display may vary depending on the ins tant messaging servi ce. You can us e the other functions of the phone while yo u have an active instant messaging s ession in the b ackground. Depending on the network, the acti ve
Menu func t ions 61 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. instant messaging session may consume the phoneâ s battery f aster and you may need t o connect the phone t o a char ger. Instant messaging uses shared me mory, see Shared memory on p age 14 . Basic steps for the instant messaging ⢠To ent er the instant me ssaging menu (offline), s ee Ente ri ng th e in stan t messaging menu on page 62 . ⢠To conne ct to the service (online), see Connecting to and disconne cting from the instant messaging service on page 63 . ⢠To start a conversation with a contact, see IM cont acts in Starting an instant messaging conv ersation on page 63 . To create your own contact lists, see Contacts for instant messa ging on page 67 . ⢠To join a public group, see Groups in Starting an instant messaging conversation on page 63 . To join an instant messaging group via an invit ation message, see Accepting or rejecting an invitation on page 64 . To creat e your own gr oup, or to join or delete a public group, see G roups on page 68 . ⢠To edit your own infor mation, see Editing your own s ettings on page 66 . ⢠To s earch users and groups, see Search in Starting an instant messaging conversation on page 63 . ⢠To r ead a message, see Reading an instant mes sage on page 65 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 62 ⢠To wr ite and send messages during an a ctive session, s ee P articipating in a conversation on page 66 . ⢠To view, r ename or delete saved conversations, select Saved convers. whe n yo u have entered the Instant messages menu. ⢠To block /unblock c ontacts, see Bloc king and unblocking mes sages on page 68 . ⢠To dis connect from t he service, see Connecting to and disconnecting f rom the instant messaging service on page 63 . En ter ing the ins tant mes sag ing men u To enter th e Instant messages menu while still offline , press Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . Activat e a service and then select ⢠Login to conne ct to the service. To s et the phone to aut omatically connec t to the service when you enter the Instant messages menu, see Connecting to and disconnec ting from the instant messaging s ervice on page 63 . ⢠Saved conve rs. to view, erase or r ename the conversat ions that you have saved during a se ssion. You can select Saved conve rs. also whe n you have connected to the se rvice. ⢠Connect. settings to a ccess the se ttin gs ne eded fo r a conne cti on. S ee Instant messaging settings on page 69 . You c an select Connect. settings also w hen you have c onnected to t he service.
Menu func t ions 63 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Connecti ng to and dis connect in g from the ins tant mes sag ing ser vice To connect to the service, enter the Instant messages menu, activat e a service and sel ect Login . Select one of the available s ets. If necessar y key in the Us er ID : and the Pas s w o r d : . W hen the phone has successfully connected, Logged in is displayed. Tip: To se t the phone to automatically connect to t he instant mess aging service when y ou enter the Instant me ssages menu, connect to the serv ice, sel ect My settings , Automatic login and On I M s tar t- up . To disconnect from the service, select Logout . St art in g an in st ant me ssag i ng c on vers ati on Ent e r t he I nstant messages me nu and connect to a s ervice. You can select ⢠Conversations to view t he list of new and read messages or invitations to instant me ssaging during the active s ession. Scroll to t he message or i nvitation that you want and press Open to rea d the me ssa ge. indicates the new and the read ins tant messages. indicates the ne w and the read group messages. indicates the invitations. ⢠IM contacts i ncl udes the cont act s that y ou hav e adde d. S cro ll to the c onta ct to whom you would like to send instant messages and press Cha t or press Ope n if a new message is s hown in the list. If you have receiv ed a new mes sage from a c ontact, it is indicated with . indicates the online and the offline contacts in the phoneâ s contacts memory.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 64 indicates a b locked contac t, refer to Blocking and unbloc king messages on page 68 . To add contacts to t he list , see Contacts for instant messaging on page 67 . ⢠Groups and Public groups . The list of bookmarks t o public groups provided by the network operator or service provider is displaye d. T o start a conversation, scroll to a group and pres s Join . E nter the s creen name th at you want to use in the conversa tion. When you have successfully joined in the group conversation, the phone shows Joined group: and the g roup name. T o create a private group, see Groups on page 68 . ⢠Search and select Us er s or Groups to search f or other users or public groups on the ne t work. ⢠If you select Use rs , you can search for a user by phone number, sc reen name, e- mail address or name. ⢠If you select Grou ps , you can sear ch for a group by a member in the group or by gr oup name, topic or ID. To start t he session when you hav e found the user or the group th at you want , press Option s and sele ct Chat or J oin group . ⢠To s tart a session fr om Contacts, see Viewing t he subscribed names on page 92 . Accepti ng or reje cti ng an inv it ation In standby mode, when you have c onnected to t he service and you receive a new invitation, New invitation received is displayed. Pr ess Read to re ad it.
Menu func t ions 65 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If more than one invi tation is recei ved, the number of messages followed by new invitations received is displayed. Pr ess Re a d , scroll t o an invita tion that you want and pr ess Op en . ⢠To join the private gr oup conversation, pr ess Acce pt . Ente r th e sc ree n nam e that you want to use as a nic kname. When you hav e succes sfully joined th e group, the phone shows Joined group: and the group name. ⢠To r eject or delete the invi tation, press Options and sele ct Reject or Delete . Readin g a n in stant m essa ge In standby mode, when you have c onnected to t he service and you receive a message f rom a person who is not tak ing part in the c onversation, New in stant message is displayed. Press Read to rea d it. If more than one messag e is receiv ed, the number of messages followed by new instant messages is displayed. Press Read , scroll to a message and press Open . New messages receiv ed during an active ses sion are held in the Conversations of the Instant messages menu. If the mes sage is f rom a person whos e contact information is missing from the cont act list in IM c ontacts , the s enderâÂÂs ID i s shown. If the contact information can be found in the phoneâÂÂs memory for contacts and the phone r ecognises it , the senderâÂÂs name is sh own. To save a new contact in the phoneâÂÂs memor y, press Options and s elect ⢠Save cont act and enter the name of the person. ⢠Add to contact and select the contact t o which you want to add t he detail and press Add .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 66 Pa rtic ipa tin g in a co nv er sat ion Join or s tart a sessi on by pressing Wr ite . Tip: If you receive a new me ssage d uring a conver sation from a person that is not wit hin the active conversat ion, the indicator is shown on the top of the dis play and a a larm tone is played. Write your message and press Send or to send it. If you press O ptions , some of the following options are availa ble: ⢠View c onversation to view the ongoing conversation. To save the conversation, press Save and enter a name for the conve rsation. ⢠Save cont act , re fer to Reading an instant message on pa ge 65 . ⢠Add to contact , r efe r to Reading an insta nt message on page 65 . ⢠Group members to view the member s of the s elected priva te group. The option is only shown if you have create d the group. ⢠End conver sation to end the ongoing convers ation. ⢠Dictionar y re fer to Writing t ext on page 38 . Editi ng your own s et tings Ent e r t he Instant messages menu and connect to the service. Select My settings to view and e dit your own availability inf ormation or screen name. Select A vailability and A v ailable for all or A vail. for contacts (or Appear offline ) to allow all the other users or only th e contacts on your contact list to see that you are online when you have c onnected to t he service. When you are connec ted to the service, indicat es that you are online and that you are not visible to others.
Menu func t ions 67 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Contact s fo r inst ant messagi ng To add contacts to t he instant messaging contacts lis t, connect t o the service and sel ect IM c o nt ac ts . If the contacts list is empty the phone displays Contact lis t empty . Copy contacts from serv er? to retrieve available contact s from the s erver. Other wise press Options and select Add contact , or if y ou have no contact s added, press Add . Select ⢠Enter ID manually to ente r th e ID m anu al ly. ⢠Search f rom serv . to search for a contac t from the serve r. ⢠From contacts to sea rch for a name in Con ta ct s . ⢠Copy from server to c opy a name f rom a server-ba sed contacts lis t. When the contact is added, the phone displays A dded to IM contacts: and the contact name. Scroll t o a contact, and pr ess Chat to start a session or press Options a nd select ⢠Contact info to view the de tails of t he selected contact . If you want to edit the details, s ee Editing or deleting det ails in the Con ta ct s menu (menu 3) on page 88 . ⢠Edit name to edi t the c onta ctâ s nam e. ⢠Block cont act (or Unblock contact ) to block (or unbloc k) the messa ges from the sele ct ed co nta ct. ⢠Add contact to add a new c ontact from t he phoneâÂÂs conta ct memory. ⢠Remove contact to remove a contact from the conta ct list.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 68 ⢠Copy to server to copy a name t o a serve r-based contact s list. ⢠A vailability alerts to mark those contacts from whom you wis h to receiv e availability aler ts. Blocki ng an d unbloc kin g mess ages Connect to the service and s elect Conversations or IM cont acts . Highlight t he contact in the contacts list from whom you want to block incoming mes sages. Press Option s , selec t Block contact and press OK . To unblock the message s, connect t o the s ervice and s elect Blocked list . Scroll to the contact from whom you want to unblock the mes sages and press U nblock . You can a lso unblock the me ssages from the contact list, see Contacts fo r instant messaging on page 67 . Groups You can c reate your own private groups for a session, or use the public groups provided by the servi ce provider. The private groups e xist only during an a ctive session. You can add t o a private gr oup only the contacts that ar e in your contact list and t hus in the phoneâ s contacts memory, see Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact ) on page 84 . If the server you are logged onto doe s not support group services all groups related menus are dimmed. Public groups You can boo kmark public groups that your service provider may maintain. Connect to t he service, se lect Groups and Public groups . Scroll to a group that you want to chat with and pr ess Join . If you are not in t he group, key in your screen
Menu func t ions 69 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. name as your nickname for the group. If you press Options , you can selec t De lete group to delete a group f rom your group list. Creating a private group Connect to the service, select Groups and Create group . Key in the name for the group and t he screen name that you want to use for the group. You can use another s creen name in a nother group. Ma rk your private group members from the contacts list and k ey in an invit ation to newly added members. In stan t m ess a gin g se ttin gs You may receive the settings as a configuration message from the network operator or service provider. To r eceive the s ettings as a c onfiguration message, see Configur ation settings service on page 17 . To key in the settings manually, see Configuration settings on page 11 3 . F or the instant messaging and pr esence settings, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. To enter th e Instant messages menu while still offline , press Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . Activat e a service and select Connect. settings . Select ⢠Configuration and scroll to the set you w ould like to activate a nd press Selec t. ⢠Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If more than one account is displayed c hoose the one y ou want to us e. ⢠User ID to v i e w o r to e d i t t h e us e r I D. ⢠Pas s wo rd to enter the pass word .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 70 E-mail applica tion The e- mail applicat ion allows you to access the compatible e-mail account t hat you us e in the office or at home, via the phone (networ k service). You can write , send, and read e-mails with your phone. Your phone supports POP3 and IMAP4 e- mail se rvers. The e- mail applicat ion uses shared memory, see Shared me mory on page 14 . Before y ou can send and r etrieve any e- mails, you ma y need to do the following: ⢠Obtain a new e-mail ac count or use the curr ent one. To c heck the availability of your e-mail acc ount contact your e- mail service provider. ⢠To che ck the settings required for the e-mail application, c ontact your network operator or e-mail ser vice provider. T o receive t he e-mail s ettings as a configuration mes sage, see Conf iguration settings s ervice on page 17 . ⢠To s et the e-mai l settings on your phone, press Menu and select Messages , Message settings and E-mail mes sages . See Settings for e-mail application on page 78 . Writin g and s endi ng an e-mai l You can w rite your e-ma il before connec ting to the e-mail service, or connect to the service first, and then write and send your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Create e-mail . The waiting note is displayed. 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address and press OK or pr ess Edit and ke y in the e-mail a ddress, and press OK .
Menu func t ions 71 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To s earch for th e e-mail addres s in Contacts , press O ptions , and select Search . 3. You can k ey in a s ubject for t he e-mail if y ou want, and press OK . If you press Options , you can s elect one of the following: the message e ditor, add a ne w recipient, add a copy recipie nt or add a hidden copy rec ipient. 4. Key in the e-mail message, see Writing text on pa ge 38 . The number of charact ers that you can key in is shown o n the top right of the display. 5. To s end the e-mail, pr ess Send . Select ⢠Send now to initiate the sending ins tantly. If you have not a lready connected t o the e -mail account, your phone es tablishes the connec tion first a nd then sends the e -mail. ⢠Send later to send your e-mail lat er. The e- mail is saved in the Outbox folder. If you want to edit or continue writing your e-mail later, you can save it in Draf ts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Menu and select M essa ges and E-mail , press Option s and sele ct Send now or Retrieve and send . After sending the e-mail, the phone asks if you want to dis connect from the e - mail se rvice. Press Ye s to disc onnect or No to leave the connection open. Note : When sending e-mails , your pho ne may displa y the words Message sent . This is an in dicatio n that th e e-mail h as been sent by your phon e to the e-mail server. This is not an indica tion that the e-ma il has been r eceived at the intend ed destin ation. Fo r more details about e-mail s ervic es, check with your service prov ider.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 72 Do wnlo ad ing e-m ail s fro m you r e- mail acc oun t 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail and Re tr iev e to download e-mails that hav e been sent to y our e-mail account. Or: Press Menu and s elect Messages and E-mail , press Options and select Re tri eve and send to download new e-mails a nd to send e-ma ils that have been saved in the Ou tbox folder. If the message memory is f ull, delete some of your older messages before you start to download new messages. 2. Your p hone makes a connect ion to the e-mail service. A s tatus bar is shown while yo ur phone is downloading e-mails to your phone. After the download, the phone a sks if y ou want to dis connect from t he e-mail service . Press Ye s to disconnec t or No to leave t he connect ion open. 3. Press Selec t to view th e ne w mess ag e in the Inbox , or press Back to v i e w i t later. If more than one messag e is receiv ed, select t he message t hat you w ant to read. An unr ead text me ssage is indicated by . Reading and r eplyi ng to an e-ma il Imp ortan t: E-mail s may contain viruse s or otherwise be harmful to your device o r PC. Do not open any a ttachme nt if you are no t sure of the tru stworth iness of the sender. 1. Press Menu , select Messages , E-mail and Inbox . 2. While reading the message , press Options .
Menu func t ions 73 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. You can, for example, view the details of t he selected message, mark the message as unread, delet e it, reply to it, reply to all, for ward it or mov e the message t o another folder. If the message does not f it in the first page, pr ess Next pg. to view the next page of t he message. 3. To reply to an e- mail, press Reply . Sele ct Original text t o include the or iginal message in the reply or select E mpty screen . When replying to an e-mail, f irst confirm or edit the e-mail address and subject, then write your reply. 4. To s end the message, pres s Sen d and select Send no w . To s end the message lat er, press Se nd later . The message is moved to t he Outbox folder. After sending the message, t he phone asks if you want to disconnect fr om the e-mail ser vice. Pres s Ye s to dis connect or No to leave t he connect ion open. Inbox and Othe r fo lders (Dr afts, Arc hive, Outb ox an d Sent it ems ) Your phone has the following folders in the E-mail menu: ⢠Inbox for s aving e-mails that you have downloaded f rom your e-mail account. ⢠Other folders contains the f olders: Dr af ts f or saving unfinished e-ma ils, Archive for organising and saving your e- mails, Outbox for s aving e-mails that have not been sent, if you have s elected Send later , see Writing and sending an e-mail on page 70 , and Sent i tems for saving e- mails that hav e been sent.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 74 De let ing e-ma ils To delete e- mails, press Men u and selec t Messages and E-mail , pr ess Options and sel ect Delete messages . To dele te all message s from a fol der, select t he folder from whic h you want to delete t he messages and press Ye s . To delet e all mes sages from all folders, select All messages and press Yes . Note that deleting an e-mail f rom your phone does not delete it from the e-mail serve r. Voice messag es The v oice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it. For more information and for the voice mailbox n umber, contact your service provider. Press Menu , and select Messages and V oice messages . Select ⢠Listen t o voice mes sages to call your voic e mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in the V oice mailbox number menu. If you have two phone lines available (network service), each pho ne line may have it s own voice ma ilbox number. Refer to Call settings on page 105 . ⢠Voice mailbox number to key in, search f or or e dit your voice mailbox number and pr ess OK to save it. If suppor ted by the network, the indic ator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your v oice mailbox number .
Menu func t ions 75 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Tip: Pressing a nd holding calls your voice mailbox if you have t he number set. Info messages With t he info message network s ervice you ma y be able t o receive messages on various topics from your s ervice pr ovider. These messages may include, fo r example, weather or t raffic condit ions. For ava ilability, topics and t he rel evant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Ser vic e c omm a nds Press Menu , and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and sen d serv ic e requests (also k nown as U SSD commands), such as activation c ommands for network services, to your service provider. Delet ing a ll me ssag es from a fo lder To dele te all message s from a fol der, press Menu , and select Messages and De lete messages . To dele te all message s from a fol der, select t he folder from whic h you want to delete t he messages and press OK to confirm the query. If the folder contains unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete t hem also.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 76 Messag e s etti ngs The mes sage settings affect the se nding, receiv ing and viewing of messages. Se ttin gs fo r text an d SMS e- ma il mess age s Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings and Text messages . Sending profile Select Sending profile . If more than one me ssage profile s et is supported by your SIM card, select the s et that you want to change. â¢S e l e c t Message centre number to save the phone nu mber of the message centre that is required for sending text mes sages. You will receive this number from y our service provider. â¢S e l e c t Messag es sen t via to select the messa ge type Text , E-mail , P aging or Fax . â¢S e l e c t Message validity t o select t he length of time for wh ich the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For the message type Text , sel ec t Default recipient number to sa ve a defa ult number for sending messages for this profile. Fo r the mes sag e ty pe E-mail , select E- mail server to save th e e-mail ser ver number. â¢S e l e c t Delivery repo rts to ask t he network to s end deliver y reports about your messages (netw ork service). â¢S e l e c t Use GP RS and select Ye s to se t GPRS as the pref erred SMS beare r. Also, set GPRS connection to Alway s online , see (E)GPRS connection on page 111 .
Menu func t ions 77 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â¢S e l e c t Reply via same ce ntre to allow the r ecipient of your me ssage to send you a re pl y via you r me s sag e cen t re (n et w or k s e rv ic e) . â¢S e l e c t Rename sending profile to change th e name of t he selected mes sage profile. The default profile cannot be renamed. The message profile sets are only displayed if your SIM car d supports more t han one set. Save me ssage setting Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings , T ext messages and Save sent messages . Select Yes to set the phone to save sent multimedia messages in t he Sent items folder. If y ou select No , the sent messages are not saved. Setti ngs f or mul t imedia me ssages If Allow multimedia recept ion is se t to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may cha rge you for every mes sage you receiv e. The default set ting to rec eive multimedia mes sages is generally on. Press Menu , and select Messages , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save s ent messages . Select Yes to set the phone t o save sent mult imedia messages in the Sent items fol der. If you select No , the se nt me ssa ges are not sav ed. ⢠Deliv ery reports to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (netw ork service). ⢠Scale image down to define the image size when you inse rt the image int o the multimedia message. ⢠Default slide timing to defi ne the default time f or slides in multimedia messages.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 78 ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Choose No , Yes or In home network to use the multimedia service. If you choos e In home network , you can not receiv e multimedia messages when outside your home network. If Allo w multimedia reception is set to Ye s or In home network , yo ur operator or service provider may charge you f or every message you r eceive. The default setting to receive mult imedia messages is ge nerally on. ⢠Incoming multimedia mes sages . Select Retrieve to se t th e p hon e t o automatically fetch newl y recei ved multimedia mess ages, or select Reject if you do not w ish to rec eive multimedia mes sages. This setting is not shown if Allow multimedia reception is se t to No . ⢠Configuration settings . Select Configuration and sel ect the def ault service provi der for r etrieving multimedia messages. Select Account to see the account s provided by the service provide r. If more t han one account is displaye d choose the one t hat you want to use. You may r eceive the settings as a configuration message from the network operator or service provider. To receive the settings a s configuration message , see Configuration se ttings servi ce on page 17 . T o key in t he setti ngs manually s ee Configuration settings on page 11 3 . ⢠Allow adverts to choose if you allo w the rece ption of messages defined as advertisement s. This se tting is not shown if Allow multimedia reception is set to No . Setti ngs f or e-mai l a ppl icati on You may receive the e-mail settings a s a configuration message fr om the network opera tor or service provider. For receiving t he settings as a configuration message,
Menu func t ions 79 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. see C onfiguration settings servic e on page 17 . To key in the settings manually s ee Configuration settings on page 11 3 . Select eac h of th e settings individually and key in all the required settings. Contact your network operator or e- mail service provider for the settings. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , and E-mail messages . Select ⢠Configuration and scroll to the set tha t you would like to act ivate and press Select . ⢠Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If more than one account is displayed c hoose the one t hat you want to use. ⢠My name . Key in your name or nic kname. ⢠E-mail addres s . K ey in e-mail address. ⢠Include signature . You can d efine a signat ure that is automat ically added to the end of your e -mail, when you wr ite your me ssage. ⢠Reply-to addr ess . Key in t he e-mail address to whic h you want t he replies to be sent. ⢠SMTP user name . Key in the name that you want to use for out going mails. ⢠SMTP password . Key in the pas sword that y ou want to us e for outgoing mails . ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Yes to pe rform manual user aut hentication for intranet connec tions. ⢠Incoming server type . Select either POP3 or IMAP4 depending on t he type of e- mail system t hat you are using. If both t ypes are supported, select IMAP4 . ⢠Incoming mail s ettings
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 80 If you have se lected POP3 as the inco ming server type, t he following opt ions ar e s h o wn : ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Key in t he maximum number of e-mails that y ou want to retrieve at a time. ⢠POP3 user name . Key in the user name. ⢠POP3 password . Key in t he password. ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Ye s t o perform manual user authenticat ion for intr anet connections. If you have se lected IMAP4 as the incoming serve r type, the following options ar e s h o wn : ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Key in t he maximum number of e-mails that y ou want to retrieve at a time. ⢠Retrieval me thod . Select La tes t if you want t o retrieve all newly re ceived e- mails or select Latest unread if you want to r etrieve only e- mails that y ou have not read. ⢠IMAP4 user name . Key in the user name. ⢠IMAP4 password . K ey in the password. ⢠Display t erminal window . Select Ye s t o perform manual user authenticat ion for intr anet connections. Common setting s Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Othe r se ttings and Font siz e to selec t the font size for reading and w riting messages.
Menu func t ions 81 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Messag e co unt er To vie w how many mess ages you have sent and received, press Menu and select Messages and Message counter . Select Sent messages or Rece ived messages or sel ect Clear counters to clear the coun ters. â Call re gist er The phone registers t he phone numbers of missed, received and dialled calls, and the approximate length of your calls. The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within the networkâ s service ar ea. When you press Options in the Missed calls , Received calls and Dialled numbers menus, you can, for example, vie w the date and the time of the call, e dit or delet e the phone number from the lis t, save the number in Contacts , or send a message to the nu mber . Recent calls lists Press Menu , and select Call register and then select ⢠Missed calls t o view the list of up t o 20 phone n umbers from which somebody has tried t o call you (network service). T he number in front of the (name or) phone number indica tes the amount of call att empts from that caller.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 82 Tip: When a note about missed c alls is displayed, pr ess List to acce ss the list of phone numbers. Scr oll to the number that you would like to call back and press . ⢠Received c alls to view t he list of up to 20 phone numbers from which yo u have most recently accepted or reject ed calls (network service). ⢠Dialled numbers to view the list of up to 20 phone numbers that you have mos t recently call ed or atte mpted to call. Tip: In standby mode, press onc e to access the list of dialled numbers. Scroll t o the number or name that you want, and pres s to call the number. ⢠Delete rec ent call lists to delete the recent calls lists. Se lect whether you want to delete all the phone numbers in the r ecent calls lists, or only those numbers in the miss ed calls, receiv ed calls or dia lled numbers lists. You c annot undo this operation. Coun ters and time rs f or cal ls, d ata a nd m essag es Note : The actual invoice for cal ls and services from your se rvice provider may vary, depend ing up on ne twork fe atu res, rou nding off fo r billing, taxe s and so for th. Press Menu , and select Call register and t hen select ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximate durat ion of your incoming and outgoing calls in hours, minutes and seconds. The security c ode is required to clear t he timers.
Menu func t ions 83 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If you have two phone lines available (n et work service), each phone line has its own call duration timers. T he timers of t he cur rently selecte d line are displaye d. Refer to Call settings on page 10 5 . ⢠GPRS data count er . Scroll to check the amounts of data t hat were sent or received in the las t session, data s ent and receiv ed in total, and to clea r the counters. T he counter unit is a byte. The secu rity code i s required to clear the counters. ⢠GPRS connec tion timer . Scroll to check the approximate duration of the last GPRS connect ion or the tota l GPRS connection t ime. You can also clear t he timers. T he security code is required to clear the timers. â Cont acts You can s ave names and phone numbers (Contacts) in the phoneâÂÂs memor y and in t he SIM cardâÂÂs memory. ⢠The phoneâ s memory may save up to 1000 names with numbers and text notes about eac h name. You ca n also save an image for a certain number of names. T he number of name s that ca n be saved depends on the length of the names, and the number a nd length of the phone number s and text it ems. Contacts use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 . ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 254 names and phone numbers. N ames and numbers sa ved in the SIM cardâÂÂs memory, are indica ted by .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 84 In dynamic contacts you can publish yo ur current availability status to communicate t o anyone who has access to this serv ice and who is requesting th is information. You can vi ew the availabilit y status of any of the cont acts that y ou have s ubscribed to in t he Subscribed names menu and in the detaile d view of a name in Contacts . See My presence on page 89 . Selecting setti ngs f or cont acts Press Menu and select Contacts and Settings . Sele ct ⢠Memory in use to select t he memory, either SIM card or phone, that you want to use f or your contacts. To recall names and number s from bot h memories f or contacts, s elect Phone and SIM . In that case, the names and numbers will be saved in the phoneâÂÂs me mory. ⢠Contacts view to select how the names, numbe rs and images in contacts are displaye d. ⢠Memory status to view how much memory is available in the select ed memory for contacts. Savi ng nam es a nd ph one nu mbe rs (A dd cont act ) Names and numbe rs will be s aved in t he used memory, see Selecting settings for con t act s above. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Add new contact . 2. Key in the name and press OK . See Using traditional text input on page 39 .
Menu func t ions 85 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 3. Key in the phone number, a nd press OK . To key in the numbers, see Making a cal l on page 34 . 4. When the name and number are saved, press Do ne . Tip: Quick save In st andby mode, key in t he phone number and press Save . Key in t he name, press OK and Don e . Saving m ultip le num bers or tex t items per na me You can s ave different t ypes of phone numbers and short t ext items per name in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory for contacts. The fir st number saved is automatica lly set as the default number and it is indicat ed with a frame around the number type indicator, for example . Whe n you se lect a name from cont acts, for e xample to make a cal l, the def ault number is used unless you select another number. 1. Make s ure that the memory in use is eit her Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting s ettings for contacts on page 84 . 2. To ac cess the list of names and ph one numbers, move the joys tick down in standby mode . 3. Scrol l to the name saved in the phone âÂÂs internal memory for t he contact to which y ou want to add a new number or text it em, and press Det ails . 4. Press O ptions and select Add number or Add detail . 5. To add a number or de tail, select one of the number types or t ext types, respe ctiv el y. ⢠If y ou select the text t ype Use r I D :
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 86 Select Search to search for a n ID by a mobile phone number or an e-mail address in the server of the operator or service provider if you have connect ed to the pr esence ser vice. See My presenc e on page 89 . If only one ID is fo und, it is automat ically sa ved. Otherwise, to save th e ID, press Options , and select Save . To key in t he ID, select Enter ID manually . Key in the ID and press OK to sa ve it. To change the number or text type, select C hange type in the options lis t. Note that you cannot change the type of an ID when it is on the IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. To s et the select ed number as the de fault number, select Set as default . 6. Key in the number or text item and press OK to sav e it . 7. Press Back and then Exit to return to sta ndby mode. Addi ng an image t o a nam e or n umber i n contact s You can a dd an image in s upported format to a name or number saved in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory. Move the joys tick do wn in standby mode, scroll to the contact t hat you want to add an image to and press Details . Press Options and select Add image . The phone opens the list of folder s in the Gallery . Scroll to the des ired image, press Options and se lect Save to contacts . A c opy of the ima ge is added to the contact .
Menu func t ions 87 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Sear ching for a con tact 1. Press Menu and select Con t act s and Search , or t o quickly find a contact name, move th e joystick down in standby mode . 2. You can key in the first characters of the name you are searching for in the pop-up window . Move th e joystick up and down to scroll through the na mes in the lis t, and move the joystick left and right t o move the cursor in t he pop-up window. 3. Scroll t o the contact name that you want, and press Details . Press View to see the whole information. Depending on the Con ta ct s vi e w selection in Selecting settings for contacts on page 84 , the subscr ibed names are shown differently. Only the availability indicat or or the availa bility indicator, t he personal logo and the status message are shown. Press Det ails and all of the dynamic infor mation is shown. Tip: Viewing a contact. To quick ly vi ew a specifi c name with the default phone number, pr ess and hold at t he name while scrolling through the c onta ct na mes. To vie w the sta tus message in f ull, press Details and press and hold at the dynamic c ontact while scrolling t hrough the contact names. Deleting co ntact s Press Menu and select Contacts and De le te t o delete contac ts and all the det ails a ttac hed to the m.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 88 ⢠To dele te contact s individually, sele ct One by one and scr oll to the name that you want t o delete. Pr ess De lete and press Ye s to confirm. If the contact has an ID in IM c ontacts or in the Subs cribed names lis t, t he note Presence information will be delet ed is shown before the c ontact is delete d. ⢠To dele te contact s all at once, select Delete all and then s cro ll to eith er of th e Phone or SIM card memories and press De lete . Pres s Yes and confirm with the securit y code. Editin g or deleti ng det ails Search f or the contact that you want to edit or delete and press Details . Scroll to the name, number, te xt item or image that you want t o edit or de lete and press Options . ⢠To edit a name, number or text item or to change image, select Edit name , Edit number , Edit detail or Change image , res p ect i ve ly . Note th at you cannot edit or delete a n ID when it is in IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. ⢠To dele te a number or text item, select Delete number or Delete detail , respect ively. ⢠To dele te an image attached to t he contact, select Delete image. Deleting a n image fr om contacts does not delete it from Gallery .
Menu func t ions 89 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. My presence With t he presence s ervice (n etwork ser vice) you can share your presence status with other users, for example your family, friends and colleagues with compatible devices and acce ss to the s ervice. Pre sence status includes your a vailability, st atus message and personal logo. O ther users who hav e access t o the ser vice and who are r equesting your informat ion are able t o see yo ur status. The r equested information is shown in Subs cribed names in the viewers Cont acts menu. You can personalis e the information that you want to share with ot hers and contr ol who can see y our status. Before y ou can use presence, you need to s ubscribe to t he service. To check the availability, for charging details and to subscribe to t he service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you als o receive your unique I D and pas sword and the settings for the service. T o set the required settings for the presence servic e, see In stant messaging settings on page 69 . While you hav e connected t o the pres ence servic e, you can use the othe r functions of the phone, and t he presence s ervice is active i n the back ground. Press Menu and select Contacts and My presenc e . Select ⢠Connec t to 'My pre sence' serv ice (or Disconnect ) to conne ct to (or to disconnect from) the service . ⢠My current presence to change your presence status. Select ⢠View cur rent presence and select Private pres . or Public pres. to view your current private or public status.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 90 ⢠My availability to set your av ailability sta tus to Av ailable indicated by , or to Busy indicated by , or to N ot available indicated by . ⢠My presence message and key in t he text to be shown to other persons or press Option s and sele ct Previous msgs . and select an old message as t he stat us me ss age. ⢠My presence logo to select y our personal logo f rom the Graphics folder in the gallery. If you s elect the Default , the logo is not publis hed. ⢠Show to to select t he groups to whom you want t o show your pres ence status or if not to s how it at all . Select Private and public and contacts in y our privat e list are able to see all your pr esence information: availabilit y, stat us message and logo. O ther contacts ca n see only your ava ilability. Select Private vie wers and t he contacts in your private list can see all your presence information (availabilit y, status mes sage and logo). Other users will not s ee any informa tion. If you select No on e , no one can see your presence information. ⢠Viewers and select ⢠Curr ent viewers to view all the persons who hav e subscribed to your presence info rmation. ⢠Private list is a list of the pe rsons who are allowed to vie w all your pres ence information, incl uding availa bility, status message and logo. You can manage your own privat e list. Other persons who are not in the pr ivate list, can see only your av ailability.
Menu func t ions 91 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Blocked list to vie w all the persons you have blocked from viewing yo ur presence info rmation. ⢠Settings and select ⢠Show current presence in idle to show the c urrent status indicator in standby mode. ⢠Synchronise w ith profiles to select whether y ou want to update y our My presence message and My availabilit y manually or aut omaticall y by linking them to the currently active profile. Refer also to Profiles on page 99 . Note that you cannot link a personalised status logo to a Profile. ⢠Connection type to se lect if the phone connects automatically t o the service when the phone is switched on. ⢠IM and my presenc e settings , see Instant messaging settings on page 69 . Subscr ibed na mes You can c reate a list of contacts whose presence status information you want to be aware of . You can view the information if t he contacts allow you to vie w it and if it is not prevente d by the contact or net work. You can v iew thes e subscribed names either by scrolling through t he contacts or via the Subscribed names menu. Ensure t hat the memor y in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 84 . To conne ct to the Presence s ervice, press Me nu and select Co nt ac ts , My presence and Connect to 'My pr esence' ser vice . You can view the su bscribed names even
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 92 when you are not connec ted to the presence ser vice but you c annot see the presence status informat ion about the cont act. Adding co ntac ts to t he su bscri bed names 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . If y ou have not connect ed to the Pres ence servic e, the phone asks if you want to connect now. 2. If you have no c ontacts on your list, pres s Add . Otherwise, press Options and sel ect Subscribe new . The list of your contacts is shown. 3. Select a cont act from the list and if t he contact has a u ser ID saved, the contact is added to the subscribed names list. If t here is more t han one ID, select one of them. Aft er subscription of the contact, Subs cription activat ed is show n. Tip: To s ubscribe to a contact f rom Contacts list, move the joystick down in standby mode and scroll to the contact y ou want to s ubscribe to. Press Details and press Options . To subscribe, select Request presence and sele ct As s ubscription . If you only want to view the prese nce information but not to subscribe to a contact, select Request presence and One time only . View ing th e subs cr ibed name s Refer a lso to Searching for a contact on page 87 to view the pres ence information. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . The s tatus information o f the first contact on the s ubscribed names list is displaye d. The information that the per son wants to give to others may incl ude text a nd some of t he following icons:
Menu func t ions 93 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. , or indicate that the pers on is either avai lable, discr eet or not available. indicates that the personâÂÂs presence information is not available. 2. Press D etails to view the details of the se lected contact, or press Op tions and sel ect ⢠Subscribe new t o add a new contact to the list o f subscribed names . ⢠Chat to st art a conv ersa t ion . ⢠Send message to send a text message to the selecte d contact. ⢠Send SMS e-mail to send an e-mail t o the select ed contact. ⢠Send bus. card to se nd a bus iness c ard to the sel ecte d cont act . ⢠Uns ubscribe t o remove the selected contact from the list of subscribed names. Un su bscr ibin g a con ta ct ⢠To uns ubscribe a contact from the Contacts list, move the joys tick down in standby mode and scroll to t he contact that you want t o unsubscribe. Pre ss Details and De tai ls again, select the ID and press Options . To unsubscribe, sel ect Unsubscribe and press Ye s t o confirm. ⢠To uns ubscribe via the Subscr ibed names menu, see Viewing the subscribed names on page 92 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 94 Co pyin g cont acts You can c opy names a nd phone numbers from t he phoneâÂÂs memory to your SIM cardâÂÂs memory and vice versa. Note that any text items saved in t he phoneâÂÂs internal me mory, such as e- mail addresses, w ill not be copied t o the SIM card . 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Copy . 2. Select the cop ying direction, From phone to SIM card or From SIM card to phone . 3. Select One by one , All or Default numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the name that you want to copy and pres s Copy . Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone t o the SIM card. Only the default numbe rs will be copied. 4. To choos e whether you want to keep or delete the or iginal names and numbers, sel ect Keep original or Move original . ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , pr ess Ye s when Copy contacts? or Move contacts? is displayed. Sending and r eceiving a bu sine ss ca rd You can s end and receive a pers onâÂÂs contact informat ion from a compatible dev ice as a b u s in e ss ca rd .
Menu func t ions 95 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. When you have received a busines s card, pr ess Show and Save to save the business c ard in the phoneâ s memory. To disc ard the business car d, press Exit and then Yes . To s end a business card, search f or the name and phone number t hat you wa nt to send from Contacts , press Details and O ptions and select Send bus. car d . Select Via infrared , V ia te xt message (network serv ice ) or Via multimedia (network service ) and D efault number or All details . No pic tures can be s ent if you choose Via text message . Speed dials To assign a number to a speed-dialling k ey, press Menu and select Contacts and Speed dials and scroll t o the speed- dialling key number that you want. Press Assign , or if a number has alr eady been assigned to the k ey, press Options and se lect Change . Press Search , and sele ct first the name and t hen the number that you want to as sign. If the Speed dialling f unction is of f, the phone asks whether you want to a ctivate it. See also Speed dialling in Call settings on page 105 . To mak e a call us ing the speed-dia lling keys, see Speed dialling a phone number on page 35 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 96 Voice dialling You can ma ke a phone c all by say ing a voice tag that has bee n added to a phone number. Any s poken word(s), su ch as a pe r sonâÂÂs name(s), can be a voice tag. You can add up to ten voic e tags. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠Voice tags a re not la nguage-d epend ent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's vo ice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are se nsitive to background noi se. Record voice ta gs and use th em in a quiet environme nt. ⢠Very short na mes are not accepted. Use long name s and avoid similar n ames for differ ent num be rs . Note : Using voice ta gs may be dif ficult in a noisy enviro nment or duri ng an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely sole ly upon voic e diall ing in all circ umstances . Adding and managin g voi ce tags Save or c opy in the phoneâÂÂs memory the cont acts to which you want t o add a voice tag. You can also add voice t ags to th e names in the SIM card, but if you replace y our SIM car d with a new o ne, you first need to de lete th e old voice tags before you can add new ones . Voice tags use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 14 . 1. In standby mode, move t he joystick down. 2. Scroll to the contact to which you want to add a voice tag and press Details . Scroll t o the phone number you want and pr ess Options . 3. Select Add voice tag .
Menu func t ions 97 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 4. Press Start , and sa y clearl y the word( s) you w ant to rec ord as a v oice tag . Afte r recording, the phone plays the recorded t ag. When the voic e tag has been successfully sav ed, V oic e tag saved is displayed, a beep s ounds and a symbol appears af ter the phone number with a v oice tag. To che ck the voice tags , press Men u and select Contact s and V oice tags . Scroll to the cont act with the vo ice tag that y ou wan t, an d pre ss Select to see the opt ions to li sten to, del ete or change the recorded v oice tag. Makin g a call by us in g a voice tag If the phone is running an applicat ion using the GPRS connection s ending or receiving da ta, first end t his application to mak e a call by using voic e dialling. 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the right selection k ey. A short tone is heard and Speak no w is displayed. 2. Say t he voice tag clearly. The pho ne plays the r ecognised voice tag and th en dials the phone number of t he voice tag after 1.5 se conds. If you ar e using a compatible headset wit h the headset k ey, pre ss and hold the headset k ey to st art the voice dialling. Info numb ers a nd s ervice num bers Your service provider may have included information numbers or service numbers in your SIM ca rd. These menus are only shown if suppor ted by your SIM card.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 98 Press Menu and select Contacts and Info numbers or Service number s . Scroll through a category to an information number, or to a s ervice number, and press to ca ll the number. My numbers The phone numbers assigned t o your SIM card ar e saved in My numbers if this is allowed b y the c ard. To view the number s, pres s Menu and select Contacts and My numbers . Scroll to the desired name or number, and pres s Vie w . Call er gr oups You can arrange the names and phone numbers saved in Contacts into caller groups. Fo r each c aller group, you can set the phone to sound a s pecific ringing tone a nd show a select ed graphic on the display when the phone recognises a call from a phone number in the group, see be low. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a s elected caller group, see Alert f or in Tone settings on page 10 0 . Press Menu and select Contacts and Caller groups and select the desired calle r group. Select ⢠Group name , key in a n ew name for t he caller group and press OK . ⢠Group ringing to ne and select the ringing t one for the group. Default is the ringing tone selected for the currently act ive profile . ⢠Group logo and sel ect On to set the phone t o display the gr oup logo, Off not to display it, or View to view the logo.
Menu func t ions 99 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Group members to add a name to t he caller group, press Add . Scroll t o the name you want to add t o the group and press Add . To remove a name f rom a caller group, scroll to t he name that y ou want to remove, and press Options and select Remove contact . â Sett ings Prof iles Your phone has various setting gr oups, profiles, for w hich you can customise the phone tones f or different events and environments. Initially, personalis e the profiles to your own liking and t hen you only need t o activate a profile to use it. Available profiles are General , Silent , M eeting , Outdoor , My sty le 1 , an d My styl e 2 . Press Menu , and select Settings and Profiles . Scroll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To ac tivate the select ed profile, select Ac tiva te . ⢠To personalise the profile, select P ers onalise . Select t he setting you want to change and make the changes. Fo r th e to ne s ett ing s, see Tone s ettings on page 100 . To rename a profile, s elect Profile name . The General profile cannot be renamed. To cha nge your pres ence status infor mation, select My presence . This menu is available if you have set Synchronise with profiles to On , see My p re se nc e on
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 100 page 89 . Select My availability to change your availability s tatus and My presence message to edit y our status mess age. ⢠To s et the profile t o be active unt il a cert ain time up to 24 hours, select Timed and s et the time fo r the profile setting to e nd. When t he time s et for the profile expires, the previous profile that was not t imed, becomes active. Tip: To change the prof ile quickly in standby mode, pr ess the power key , scroll to t he profile that you want to activa te and press Se lect . Themes A theme is a pac kage that may include a screen saver , a wallpaper image, a ri nging tone and a colour sc heme to customise your phone for dif ferent events and envir onments. Themes are stored in Gallery . Press Menu , and select Settings and Themes . ⢠To ac tivate a theme, select Select theme to view the Themes folder in Gallery . Open the folder and scroll to a theme. Press Options and select Apply t heme . Refer also to Gallery on page 11 7 . ⢠To downloa d new theme s, select Theme downloads . Re fe r to Downloading on page 151 . To ne se t tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings and then Tone s ettings . You ca n find the s ame settings in the Profiles menu, see Pr ofiles on page 99 . N ote th at the sett in gs yo u make w ill change t he settings in the ac tive prof ile.
Menu func t ions 101 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Select Incoming call alert to choose how the phone notif ies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , A scending , Ring once , Beep once and Off . Select Ringing tone for incoming voice calls . To se lect ringing tones from Gallery , sel ect Open gallery from t he ringing tone list. Tip: If you receive a ringing tone via infr ared connection or by downloading, you can save the r inging tone in the Gallery . Select Ringing volume and Vibrat ing alert for incoming voice calls and messages. The v ibrating alert doe s not work when the phone is connec ted to a c harger, a desktop s tand, a car kit, or other like e nhancement. Select Message alert tone t o set the aler t tone for the incoming messages or Instant message aler t tone to set the aler t tone for in sta nt messa ges . Sel ect Keypad tones , o r W arning tones to s et the phone to s ound tones, f or example, when the bat tery is running out of power. Select Alert f or to set t he phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected caller group. Scroll to the c aller group you want to se lect or choose A ll calls and pr ess Ma rk . Person a l s hort cut s With persona l shortcuts you get quick acc ess to frequently us ed phone functions. Right s ele ct ion key You can a llocate one phone function fr om a predefined list to the right selection ke y. R efe r also to Standby mode on page 28 . T his menu is not shown in some operator v ariants.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 102 Press Me nu , and select Settings , P ers onal shortcuts and Right selection key . Select a functi on from the list. T he name of the right sele ction key changes in standby mode according to the function. Go to opti ons You can a llocate phone functions from a predef ined list to t he left s election key. Press Menu , and select Settings and P ersonal shortcuts . Select Sele ct 'Go to' options to choose t he functions that y ou want to appe ar in the s hortcut list. Select Organise 'Go t o' options to r earrange the funct ions on your personal shortcut list. Re fer also to Standby mode on page 28 . Voice co mmands You can have phone functions whic h can be activat ed by saying a voice tag. Up to five f unctions can be selected for voice tag. Press Menu , and select Settings , P ersonal shortcuts and Voice commands . Select the function folder that yo u want and scroll to the function to wh ich you want t o add a v oice tag and press Add . A voice tag is indicated wit h . Refer to the instructions in s ection Adding and managing voice tags on pa ge 96 . To ac tivate a voi ce command, ref er to th e instructions in section Making a call by using a voice tag on page 97 . During a call or when an application us ing the (E)GPRS connect ion is sending or receiving da ta, you cannot activate or a dd a voice command. Displ ay set tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings and Display settings .
Menu func t ions 103 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â¢S e l e c t Wallpaper to set your phone to display a background image, known as wallpaper, w hen the phone is in standby mode. Some images are presaved in the Gallery menu. You can a lso receive images, for example, via multime dia messages, or transfer t hem with PC Suite fr om your PC and t hen save them in Gallery . Your phone suppor ts JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BMP and PNG formats but not neces sarily all variations of these file formats. To s elect the w allpaper, select Select wallpaper and open an image folder. Scroll to th e image that you want to set as wallpape r, press Options and select Set as wallpape r . To ac tivate/deactivate the wallpa per, select On / Off , respectively. Note t hat the wallpape r is not di splayed when the phone activ ates the screen save r. â¢S e l e c t Screen s aver to set your phone to display a screen saver when the phone is in standby mode and none of the phoneâÂÂs functions have been used f or a certain time. Select On to switch t he screen s aver on or Off to switch it of f. Select in Time-out the time after which th e screen saver will be activated. In Other you can set the length of t he timeout from 5 seconds t o 10 minutes (minutes:seconds). With Select s. saver y ou can choose an animation or a still image as the screen saver from Gallery . Press any key to deactivat e the s creen saver. The screen saver is also deact ivated when t he phone is out of the network cove rage area.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 104 Independent of the screen s aver set tings, for power s aving purposes, a digital clock view will be activated w hen no phone f unction has been us ed for a certain time. See Pow e r s a v i n g on page 30 . Note that the screen saver overrides all the graphics and texts on t he display in standby mode . â¢S e l e c t Colour schemes to change the colour in some display components, for example i ndicators and signal and battery bars, and the bac kground image that appea rs when using a menu function. â¢S e l e c t Menu view to set the way the phone displays the main menu. S elect Li st for the me nu list view and Gr id for the me nu grid vie w. â¢S e l e c t Operator logo to set your phone to display or hide the operat or logo. If you have not saved the ope rator logo, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. The operator logo is not di splayed when the phone activ ates the screen saver. For mor e information on t he availability of an operator lo go, contact y our network operator or service provider. See also PC Su ite on page 158 . Time an d dat e set ti ngs Press Menu , and select Settings and Time and date settings . â¢S e l e c t Clock and Show clock (or Hide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Selec t Set t he time to adjust the clock to the correct time, Time zone to set the ti me zo ne, and Time format to se lec t the 12-hour or 24-hour time format.
Menu func t ions 105 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The c lock serves the funct ions Messag es , Call register, Alarm cloc k , timed Profiles , Calendar , No tes and Screen saver , for example. If the battery i s removed from t he phone or if the battery is empty, you may ne ed to s et the ti me aga in. â¢S e l e c t Date and Sho w date (or Hide date ) and t he date is shown (or hidden) on the display when the phone is in sta ndby mode. Selec t Set the date to adjust the date. You can als o select th e date format and date sepa rator. â¢S e l e c t Aut o-update of date & time (network servic e) and On to set the pho ne to automatically update the time and date ac cording to the current time zone. To set t he phone to re quest for a c onfirmation before th e update, s elect Confirm first . The automatic update of the date and time does not change the t ime that you have s et for the alarm clock, cal endar or the alarm notes. They are in local t ime. Updating may cause some ala rms that you have set to expire. For information on availability, contact your network operator or service provi der. Call s ett ings Press Menu , and select Settings and Call settings . Select ⢠Automatic volume control and the phone will automatically adjus t the speaker volume ac cording to the bac kground noise. ⢠Call divert (network service). W ith call divert, you can direct your incoming calls to another number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 106 details, contact your service provide r. Divert options not s upported by your SIM card or your network operator may not be shown. Select the divert option y ou want, fo r example, select Divert if busy to diver t voice calls when y our number is busy or when you rejec t an incoming call. To set the diver t se ttin g to on, selec t A c tiva te and then s elect the timeout after which t he call is dive rted, if this is avai lable for the div ert option. To set the divert s etting to off, select Cance l , or select Check status , if this is available for the divert option, to check whether call divert is activated or n ot. Several divert options may be activ e at the s ame time. To s ee the diver t indicators in standby mode, s ee Standby mode on page 28 . Call barring and call dive rting cannot be active at the same t ime. ⢠Anykey answer and On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any ke y, e xcept , selection keys and , and . ⢠Automatic redial and On and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to co nnect the ca ll after an uns uccessful c all attempt. ⢠Speed dialling and On and the names and phone numbers assigned to the speed-dialling key s, from t o , can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key. ⢠Call waiting and A cti va te and the networ k will notify you of an incoming call while yo u have a call in progr ess (network ser vice). See Call wait ing on page 36 . ⢠Summary after call and On and the phone will br iefly display t he approximate duration and cost (network service) of the ca ll aft er each call.
Menu func t ions 107 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Send my cal ler ID and Yes and your phone number will be displayed to t he person you are ca lling (network service). Select Set by net work a nd t he se tting agreed upon w ith your servi ce provider is us ed. ⢠Line for outgoing calls which is a network service, to sele ct phone line 1 or 2, that is , the su bscriber number, for making c alls. For ex ample, you ca n have a private and a business line. For more inf ormation on availa bility, contact y our network operator or service provider. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribe d to this network service, y ou will not be able to make calls. H owever, calls on both lines ca n be a nswered regardless of the selected line. If suppor ted by your SIM car d, you ca n prevent t he line select ion by selecting the option Lock . Tip: In standby mod e and i f you have two lines available, you can switch fr om one line to t he other by pressing and holding . Ph one s et tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone set tings . Select ⢠Phone language to set t he display langua ge of your phone. If you sele ct Automatic the phone sele cts the language ac cording to t he informatio n on the SIM card. ⢠Automatic key guard to set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a pre-set time delay when the phone is in s tandby mode and no phone
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 108 function has been used. Sele ct On and you can set t he time from 5 seconds to 60 minutes. Refer also to Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32 . When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to t he official emergency number. Key in the emergency number and press . ⢠Cell inf o display and On to receiv e information from the network depending on the network cell used (network service). ⢠Welcome note and key in the note you would lik e to be shown briefly when the phone is switched on. T o save the note, press Save . ⢠Operat or se lection and Automatic and t he phone aut omatically selects one of the cellular networks available in your area. If you select Manual , you can select a net work that has a roaming agr eement with your home network operator. If No network acces s is displaye d, you must select another network. The phone stays in manual mode unt il the automatic mode is selected or anot her SIM card is inserted into th e phone. ⢠Confirm SIM service actions . See SIM services on page 156 . ⢠Help text activation to set the phone t o show or not to show t he help t exts. See als o Using the menu on page 42 . ⢠Start-up tone to set the phone to play or not to play a start-up tone when the phone is switched on.
Menu func t ions 109 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Connecti vity You can c onnect the phone to a compa tible devic e via an infrar ed connection or you can also define t he settings for (E)GPRS dial-up connections. Infra red You can s et up the phone to receive data through its infrared (IR) por t. To use an IR connection, t he device with which you want to establish a c onnection must be IrDA compliant . You can send or receive data such as business cards, graphics, images, sound clips, videos and calendar notes to or f rom a compatible phone or data device (for example, a computer) v ia the IR port of your pho ne. Do not poi nt the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye o r allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device i s a Class 1 Laser pro duct. Sending and receiving data via IR ⢠Ensure t hat the IR port s of the sending and receiving devic es are point ing at each other and that t here are no obstructions between the de vices. Th e preferable distance bet ween the two devices in an infrared connection is one meter at most. ⢠To activate the IR port of your phone to r eceive data via IR, press Me nu , and sel ect Settings , Connectivity and Infr ared . ⢠The us er of the t ransmitting phone select s the des ired IR function to star t the da ta tr ans fe r. If data transfer is not s tarted within 2minutes after the act ivation o f the IR port, the connection is canc elled and has to be started a gain.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 110 IR connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, t he IR c onnection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data via its IR por t. ⢠When blinks, your ph one is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. (E)GPRS GPRS (General Pac ket Radio Se rvice) is a netw ork service that allows mobile phones to be used for sending and receiving data ov er an Internet Protocol (IP)- based network. GPRS is a dat a bearer that enables wireless acces s to data networks such as the In ternet . EGPRS (Enhanced G PRS), also known as EDGE (Enhanced Dat a Rates for Global Evolution), is similar to GPRS. EDGE is a radio interface modulation t echnique which inc reases GRPS dat a rates. For mor e information on t he availability of EGPRS and data transfer spe ed, contact your network operat or or service provider. The applic ations that may use (E)GPRS are MMS, Instant messaging, brow sing sessions, e- mail, remote Sy ncML, Java applica tion downloading and the PC dial- up (for example, Internet and e-mail). Before you can use (E)GPRS technology: ⢠Contact your network oper ator or servic e provider for availability of and subscription to t he (E)GPRS s ervice. ⢠Save t he (E)GPRS settings f or each of the applications used over (E)GPRS. For inf ormation on pricing, c ontact your networ k operator or s ervice provider .
Menu func t ions 111 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Note t hat when yo u have select ed GPRS as a data bear er, the phone uses EGPRS instead of G PRS if this is available in the network. You cannot select between EGPRS and GPRS but for some a pplications you may be ab le to select eit her GPRS or G SM data (CSD, Circuit Switched Data). (E)GPRS c onnecti on Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS connection . â¢S e l e c t Always online to set the phone to automatically register t o a (E)GPRS network when you switch the phone on. When the (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. When you start an a pplication using (E)GPRS, the connection betw een phone and net work is estab lished, the indicat or is shown and dat a transfer is possible. W hen you end the a pplication, th e (E)GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the (E)GPRS network remains. If you r eceive a call or a t ext message, or make a c all during a (E)GPRS connection, t he indicator w ill be shown on the top right of the displa y to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is suspended (on hold). Note t hat GPRS and EGPRS ar e not indicated separately, the indic ators for GPRS and EGPRS are the s ame. â¢S e l e c t When needed and t he (E)GPRS registration and c onnection are established when an application using (E)GPRS needs it and closed when you end t he application.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 112 (E )GP RS m ode m set t ing s You can c onnect the phone via infrar ed or a data cabl e connec tion to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem to enable (E)G PRS connectivity from the PC. To define the settings for (E)G PRS connections fr om your PC, press Me nu , and sel ect Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and G PRS modem sett ings . â¢S e l e c t Active access point and activat e the a ccess point that you want to use. â¢S e l e c t Edit active access point t o change the ac cess p oint settings. â¢S e l e c t Alias for access point . Key in the name that you would like for the activat ed access point and press OK . â¢S e l e c t GPRS access point . Key in the Acc ess Point Name (APN) to establish a connection t o an (E)GPRS networ k and press OK . Contact your network operator or service pr ovider for t he APN. You can als o set the (E)GPRS dial- up service settings (Access Point N ame) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options sof tware, see PC Suite on page 158 . If you have s et the settings both on your PC and on your phone, note that the PCâÂÂs settings will be used. En ha ncem ent s et tin gs The enhanc ement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected t o a compat ible mobile enhance ment, chargers and handsfree units, for ex ample.
Menu func t ions 113 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Menu , and select Settings and Enhancement settings . You can select an enhancement menu if the corresponding e nhancement is or has been connec ted to the phone. Depending on the enhance ment, you can s elect some of t he following opt ions: ⢠Default pr ofile to select the prof ile that you w ant to be aut omatically activated when you connect t o the selected enha ncement. You can s elect another prof ile while the e nhancement is connected. ⢠Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming ca ll automatically after 5 seconds. If the Incoming call alert i s s et to Beep once or Off , aut omatic answer w ill not be in use . ⢠Lights to set the light s permanently On . Select Automatic to set t he lights on for 15 second s after a keypress . ⢠When the phone is co nnected t o the full car kit, select Ignition detector and On to a utomatically switch of f the phone ap proximately 20 seconds af ter you have s witched off the c arâÂÂs ignition. Config uratio n setting s Some of the network services, such as mobile Inter net services, MMS, Inst ant messages, E-Mail messages , or Synchronisation need to have t he corre ct configuration setti ngs on your phone. Get the settings from a s ervice provider as a configuration mes sage or ke y in your personal settings manually. Configuration settings fr om up to ten di fferent service pr oviders c an be stored in t he phone and can be managed within this menu.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 114 To s ave the conf iguration settings rece ived by a c onfiguration messa ge sent by a service provider, see Configuration se ttings service on page 17 . The s ettings can be v iewed and par tly edited a lso in the different a pplications. Press Menu , and select Settings , Conf iguration settings . Select ⢠Default conf iguration settings. to view the lis t of service pr oviders stored on the phone (the default s ervice provider is highlighted) and to s elect another service provider as default. Scroll to a provider and press Details to view the lis t with supported applications. T o delete a se rvice provid er from the list, press Options and select De le te . ⢠Activate default in all applications to set the applic ations to use t he settings from the de fault service provider. ⢠Preferr ed access point to select another acc ess point. No rmally the ac cess point from y our preferred ne twork operator is to be used. Keying in the settings manually To enter , view and edit the s ettings manually, press Me nu , and select Set tings , Configuration settings and Pers onal configuration settings . To add a new configuration, press Ad d new or press Options and select Add new . Choose one of the applica tion types from the lis t and k ey in all the ne cessary sett ing s. To acti vat e t he se tting s, pr ess Back and O ptions and select A c tiva te . To view or to edit the user -defined settings selec t the applicat ion that you want to view a nd select t he setting to e dit.
Menu func t ions 115 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Sec urity sett ing s When security features that restrict cal ls are in use (such as call ba rring, clos ed user group and fixed dia lling) calls still may be possib le to the o fficia l emergency n umber pro grammed into your device. Press Menu , and select Settings and Security settings . Sele ct ⢠PIN code request to set the phone to request your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. Some SIM cards do not allo w the PIN code request t o be turned off. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to r estrict incoming ca lls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required. Call barring and call dive rting cannot be active at the same t ime. ⢠Fixed dialling to restri ct your outgoing calls and text messages to s elected phone numbers if this f unction is supported by your SIM card. The PIN2 c ode is required. When the fixed dialling is on, (E)GPRS connections are not possible except while s ending text message s over an (E)GPRS connec tion. In this case, the recipientâÂÂs p hone number and the message cent re number have to be included on the f ixed dialling lis t. ⢠Closed user group . Closed user gr oup is a net work service that specifies the group of p eople whom you ca n call and who c an call you. F or more information contact your network ope rator or service provider. ⢠Secur ity level . Select Phone and the phone will request th e security cod e whenever a new SIM card is ins erted into the phone.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 116 Select Memory and the phone will reques t the security code when the SIM cardâÂÂs memory is se lected and you w ant to change t he memory in us e (see Selecting s ettings for contacts on page 84 ) or copy from one memory to another ( Copying contacts on page 94 ). ⢠Access code s to change t he security co de, PIN code, PIN2 code or barring password . Codes can only include numbers f rom 0 t o 9. Restor e f act ory se tting s To reset some of the menu settings to their original values, press Menu , and select Settings and Restore factory s ettings . Key in the s ecurity code and pr ess OK . Note that t he data that you have keyed in or dow nloaded, for ex ample, the names and phone numbers saved in contac ts are not de leted. â Operator menu This menu lets you ac cess a portal to services provided by your net work operator. This me nu is operator specif ic. The name and the icon depend on the operator . For more informat ion, contact your network ope rator. The operat or can update this menu wit h a service message. For mor e information, refer to Service inbox on page 15 1 .
Menu func t ions 117 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. â Galle ry In this menu, you can manage graphics, images , video cli ps, recordings and tones that you have saved, for example , from multimedia messages. Th ese files are arranged in folders . Your phone support s a Digital Rights Manageme nt (DRM) system to protect acquired conte nt. A piece of content, for example a ringing tone, can be protected and associat ed with certain usage rules, for example number of usage times and a certain usage period. T he rules ar e defined in t he contentâÂÂs activation ke y which can be delivered either together with the content or independently depending on the service provider. You may be able t o update these activation keys. Always check t he delivery t erms of any content and ac tivation key bef ore acqui ring them, as th ey may be subject to a fee. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ring ing t ones , and o ther conten t from bei ng c o pi ed , mo di fie d, tr ans f err ed or f o rwa rd ed. If your phone displays a message that the memory is full, delet e some of the files in Gall ery before continuing. 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . A list of folders is shown. Images , Video clips , Themes , Graphics , T ones and Recordings a re the original f olders on the phone. 2. Scroll to the desired folder and press Open t o view a lis t of files in the folder or press Option s and one of the options may be av ailable: ⢠Downloads to download more image s, tones and videos. Sele ct Graphic downloads , Tone downloads , Video do wnloads or Theme downloads . The list of available browser bookmark s is shown. Sele ct M ore bookmarks to acce ss the list of bookmarks in the Services menu, se e Bookmarks on page 150 .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 118 Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired site. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page f rom the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, ent er the Services menu a nd activate a nother set of service settings, see Mak in g a connection t o a servic e on page 146 . Try reconnecting to the site. For availa bility of differe nt services, pricing and t ariffs, contac t your network operator and/or the service provider. Download content only from the sources you t rust. ⢠Delete folder , Move, Rename folder , Details , Typ e o f v i e w , Sor t , A dd folder and A ctivation key list . You cannot delete, rename or move the original folders on t he phone. ⢠Memory status to view t he status of the second s hared memory of the phone. See Shared memory, 14. 3. If you have opened a folder, select the file that you want t o view a nd press Open . I f Themes was s elected be fore, scroll to a theme and press View to open the theme package. Select and open a file, or pres s Options and use one of the following funct ions that may be available for the selected file: ⢠Delete , Send , Edit image , Move , Rename , Set as wallpaper , Set as ring tone , Apply theme , Details , Type of view , Sort , De lete all , Open in sequence , Mute audio ( Unmute audio ), Set contrast , Add folder and Memory s tatus . ⢠Send to send t he selected file via MMS or IR c onnection. ⢠Delete all to delet e all t he files and folder s in the s elected folder.
Menu func t ions 119 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Edit image to inse rt text, a frame or clip- art into the selected pict ure or to crop the image. ⢠Open in sequence to view the files in the folder individually. ⢠Mute audio ( Unmute audio ) t o mute (unmute) the sound file. ⢠Set contrast to adjust t he contrast le vel of the image. ⢠Activate content to update the activation ke y of t he selected file. Th e option i s only shown if t he activation key of the file can be upda ted. ⢠Activation key lis t to view the list of all available activation keys. You can delete the activa tion keys, f or exa mple delete the expired one s. â Medi a Camera You can t ake photos or record video clips with t he phoneâÂÂs built-in camera. The camera lens is on the back of the phone, a nd the display of the phone wor ks as a viewfinder . The ca mera produces pictures in JPE G format and the video clips in 3GP format. If there i s not enough memory to take a new photo, you need t o free some by deleting old photos or ot her files in the gallery. The Nokia 7260 d evice su pports a n image c apture resol ution of 640 x 480 p ixels. Th e image resolution in these materials may appear different.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 120 Taking a photo or a vid eo cli p Press Menu , and select Media , Camera . The live image appears on the display, and you can us e the display as a viewfinder . Move the joyst ick to the le ft or to the r ight to change t he camera mode: Standard photo , Por trait photo or Vi de o , or if the lighting is dim f or taking photos to Night mode . If you want to add the photo to a name or a phone number s aved in contact s, select P ort rait photo . Tip: To quickly open the camera viewf inder, move t he joystick up in standby mode. ⢠To t ake a photo, pr ess Capture . A shutter sound is heard. T he phone saves the photo in the Images folder of the G allery menu. If You want to send t he photo as a multimedia message, press Send , or s elect Back t o take anothe r photo, or press Options and select, for example, an option to zoom or rename the sav ed photo or send it as a multime dia message, to se t the co ntrast, to see the details, or to set the photo as wallpaper, or to open the gallery, or to delete it . Or if y ou want to delet e the photo, press Del ete . Tip: You can ac tivate the se lf-timer of the camera for one picture at a time. Put th e camera in photo mode, pres s Options and select Self- timer . Press Start , and af ter the t imeout, the came ra takes the photo. While the s elf-timer is running, a beeping s ound is heard. â¢To start recording a video clip, press Record . When you are recording a video c lip, the remaining recording time is show n on the top of the display .
Menu func t ions 121 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. To paus e the reco rding, press Pa u s e and to resume the recording, press Continue . To stop the rec ording, press Stop . The phone saves the rec ording in the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. To view the r ecorded video c lip, press Play . Select Back to start recording a new v ideo clip, or pres s Options and select, for example, an option to dele te or rename t he saved video clip, t o set the contrast, or to see t he details, t o send it as a multimedia mes sage, or to open the gallery, or to mute/unmute the microphone. Camera se tting s Press Menu , and select Media , Camera . Pres s Options and depending on t he active c amera mode the following options may appear : ⢠Change mode to change the came ra mode. ⢠Self-timer to ac tiva te the se lf-ti mer. ⢠Mute/ Unmut e to mute or unmut e the microphone in the video mode. ⢠Open galle ry to ope n the Gallery menu. ⢠Settings to adjust th e camera settings : ⢠Default mode to define the default camer a mode. ⢠Image quality to define how much the photo file will be compressed when saving the image. Select High , N ormal or Basic . High provides the bes t image qualit y but uses more memory. ⢠Video clip lengt h to select the length of the video clips that you r ecord. The maximum length of a video clip is a pproximat ely 50 seconds in duration,
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 122 depending on conditions. Only video c lips that are of def ault length or shorter can be sent in a multimedia me ssage. ⢠Camera sounds to se t the sh ut ter soun d an d the self- time r tone to On or Off . ⢠Default t itl e to def ine the title t hat will be used when saving a photo or a video c lip. If you sele ct Aut omatic , the default title will be used, or if you sel ect My ti tl e , you can key in or edit a new ti tle. Radio The FM radio uses th e wire of the hea dset as an ante nna. A compatible h eadset need s to be att ached to the devic e for t he FM ra dio to funct ion pr operly . Warn ing : Lis ten to mus ic at a modera te level. Contin uous expos ure to high volume may damage your heari ng. Warn ing : Do not hold the de vice near your ear w hen the lo udspeaker i s in use, becaus e the volu me may be ex tremel y loud. To listen to the radio on y our phone c onnect the compatible headset to the headset c onnector on the bot tom of the phone. The lead of the he adset functions as the radio antenna, s o let it hang freely. Note t hat the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the radio s tationâÂÂs coverage in that particular area. 1. To turn on the radio, press Men u and select Media and Radio . O n the display ar e
Menu func t ions 123 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Channel location number a nd the name of the radio channe l if you have saved the chann el. ⢠Fre quency of t he radio channel. 2. If you have alr eady saved r adio channels, you can s croll to the channel t hat you would like to listen to, or select a radio channel lo cation 1 to 9 by pres sing the corresponding number key. When using the compati ble headset supplie d with the hea dset key, pr ess the key to scroll to the desired save d radio channe l. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and select Switch off to turn of f the radio. Tip: To quick ly turn of f the radio, pres s and hold . Tuning a r adio ch anne l When the radio is on, pr ess and hold t he joystick up or down to start the channel search. Searching stops w hen a ch annel is found. T o save the channel, press Options , and select Save c hannel . Key in the name of the ch annel and press OK . Select the location where yo u want to s ave the channel. Tip: To quick ly save the channel in a location 1 t o 9, press and hold the corresponding number key, then k ey in t he name of the channel and pr ess OK . Using th e ra dio When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn of f the radio.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 124 ⢠Save channel to save t he radio channel y ou have f ound, refer to Tuning a radio channel above. Up t o 20 radio channels can be s aved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Briefly move the joyst ick up or down t o start t he channel sear ch upwa rds or down wards. Th e search st ops when a channel ha s been found, press OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Briefly move the joystick up or down move t he channel search 0.1 MHz upwards or dow nwards or press and hold down th e keys to quickly search upw ards or downwar ds for a channel. T o save th e channel, pres s OK and see Save channel above. Tip: To quick ly select Manual tuning , pres s when in the Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know the frequency of the radio channel that y ou would like to lis ten to (between 87. 5 and 108.0 MHz), key it in and pre ss OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. Tip: To quick ly select Set frequency , pres s when in the Radio menu. ⢠Delete c hannel . To delete a s aved channel, s croll to it, press De le te , and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name f or the saved c hannel and press OK. ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) t o listen to the r adio using the loudspeaker (or headset). Ke ep the heads et connected to the phone. The lead of t he headset functions as the radio antenna.
Menu func t ions 125 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Mono output (or Stereo output ) to listen to the radio in mono (or in stereo). You can normally make a c all or answer an incoming c all while listening to the radio. During the call, the volume of the radio is muted. When you end the call, the radio volume will automat ically be tur ned up again. When you use the ca mera while listening to the radio, the radio is switched off. After you ha ve finished t he camera application, the radio will be s witched on again, aut omatically. When an application using an (E)GPRS or a HSCSD c onnection is sending or receiving da ta, it may interfere with th e radio. Voic e re co rd e r You can record pieces of speech, sound or an active call for up to 5 minut es. For example, this is useful when recording a name and phone number for writ ing down lat er. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Recordi ng 1. Press Menu , select Media and V oice recorder . 2. To s tart the recor ding, select Record . To start t he recording during a call, pr ess Options , and select Record . While recording a call, all parties to t he call will hear a faint beeping sound every 5 seconds approximately. When recording a call, hold the phone in the normal pos ition near to your ear. 3. To end the recording, press Stop . The recording will be sav ed in the Recordings folder of the G allery menu.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 126 4. To lis ten to the lat est recording, sele ct Play last recorded . 5. To s end to the lates t recording, s elect Send last recorded . The recording can be s e n t v i a I R o r M M S . List of re cordi ngs Press Menu , and select Media , Voice rec ord e r and Recordings list . The list of folders in t he Gallery is shown. O pen Recordings to see t he list with recordings. Press Option s and you c an select s ome of the options for files i n the Gallery . Se e Gallery on page 11 7 . â Organi ser Ala rm c lo ck The alarm clock uses the time for mat set for the clock . The alarm c lock works even when t he phone is switched off i f there is e nough power in the battery. Press Menu , and select Organiser and Alar m clock . â¢S e l e c t Alarm time , ke y in the alarm time and press OK . To cha nge the alarm t ime, sele ct On . â¢S e l e c t Repeat alarm to s et the phone t o alert y ou on selected days of the week. â¢S e l e c t Alarm tone and select the defa ult alarm tone, per sonalise the alarm tone by selecting one from the ri nging tone list or from Gallery, or set a radio channel as the alarm tone.
Menu func t ions 127 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. If you s elect the r adio as a n alarm tone, connect the hea dset to t he phone. The phone uses t he most recent ly listened-to c hannel as an alarm tone via the loudspeak er. If the heads et is removed, the default alarm tone w ill be used instead of t he radio. W hen th e ala r m t ime exp ires The phone will sound an alert tone, and f lash Alarm! and t he current t ime on the display. Press St op to stop th e al arm. If you l et the phon e con tinu e to so und th e al arm fo r a minute or pr ess S nooze , the alarm stops for about 10 minutes and then res umes. If the alarm tim e is re ached while the device is switche d off, the device switc hes its elf on and s tart s s oundi ng t he al arm t on e. If y ou p res s Stop , the de vice asks whether yo u want to activate the device for calls . Press No to switch off the device o r Yes to make and receive call s. Do n ot p res s Ye s when wire less p hone use may cause in terfe renc e or danger . Calenda r The c alendar helps you to keep track of r eminders, calls t hat you ne ed to make, meetings, a nd birthdays. The c alendar uses shar ed memory, se e Shared memory on page 14 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and Calendar . Tip: To quickly open the Calendar menu, move the joystick to t he right in standby mode.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 128 Scroll t o the da y that you want. The current da y is indic ated by a frame around the day. If there a re any notes set for the day, the day is in bold type. To view th e day notes, press View . To vie w a week, press O ptions and select Week view . ⢠To vie w a single note, scroll to t he note that you w ant to view, press Vie w . The note view allows you t o view th e details of t he selecte d note. You can s croll through the note. ⢠For example, ther e are also opt ions for cr eating a note, or for sending a note via IR or a s a note directly to a nother compatibl e phoneâÂÂs ca lendar or as a t ext message or a multimedia mes sage. There ar e options for deleting, editing, moving and repeat ing a note and f or copying a note to another day. To dele te all notes in the calendar , select th e month or w eek view, press and sel ect Delete all notes . Settings to s et the date, time, date or time format, or the first day of the week. In the Auto-delete option you can set th e phone to delet e old notes automatically after a s pecified time. However, t he repeat notes, for e xample, birthday notes, will not be deleted. Makin g a calen dar note For key ing in letter s and numbers, see W riting text on page 38 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and Calendar . Scroll to the date you want, press Options and select Ma k e a n ot e . Se lect one of the following not e types: ⢠Meeting - Ke y in the note (o r pre ss O ptions and search f or the name in contacts) and press Save . Key in the location for the mee ting and press Save .
Menu func t ions 129 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Enter the start date and time, then enter the end date and end time for the meeting. To set the alarm f or the note, select Wit h tone or Silent (no alarm tone) a nd then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, press Sav e . Key in t he name, pres s Sa ve . (Instead of ke ying in the phone number, press Options to se arch for the nam e and number in contacts.) T hen enter the t ime for th e call. T o set the alar m for the note, select Wi th tone or Silent (no alarm t one) and then set t he alarm time. ⢠B irthday - Key in the pers onâÂÂs name (or pres s O ptions and search for it in con t act s) , p re ss Save . Then key in the year of birth, and press OK . To set the a larm for th e n ote , sel ect Wi th ton e or Silent (no alarm tone) a nd then set the alarm time. ⢠Me mo - Ke y in the note , press Save . Ente r the st art a nd end d ate fo r the note. To set th e alarm for t he note, select Wi th tone or Si lent (no alarm t one) and t hen set the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in t he subject for the reminder, press Save . To set the alar m for t he note, sele ct Alarm on and then set the ala rm tim e. When you have set the alarm, t he indicator is dis played when y ou view t he notes. W hen th e ph on e s oun ds an a l arm for a not e The phone beeps, and displays the note. With a call note on the display, you can ca ll the displayed number by pres sing . ⢠To s top the alar m without view ing the note, pres s Exit .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 130 ⢠To stop the alarm and t o view the note, press Vie w . Press Snooze and the phone sounds an alarm again after 10 minutes. To -d o li s t You can save a note for a task that you have to do, select a priority level for the note and mar k it as done when you hav e completed it. You c an sort the not es by priority or by date. The to-do list uses shared memory, s ee Shared memory on page 14 . Press Menu , and select Organiser and T o-do list . Press Add not e to make a note. Key in the note and press Sa ve . Select the priority for t he note, High , Medium , or Lo w . The phone automatic ally sets the deadline without an alarm for the note. T o change the deadline, view t he note and select the deadline option. Or scr oll to a note and press View or press Options . ⢠To add a new note, select Add . ⢠For example, you can also v iew and delete t he selected note and del ete all the notes th at you have marke d as done. You can sort the notes by pr iority or by deadline, send a note t o another phone, save a note as a calendar note, or acces s the calendar. While viewing a note, y ou can also, for example, select an opt ion to e dit the selected note, edit th e deadline or prior ity for t he note, or ma rk the note as done.
Menu func t ions 131 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Note s You can use t he Note s application f or writing and s ending notes to compat ible devices via IR or MMS. The N otes applicat ion uses shared memor y, see Shared me mory on page 14 . Press Menu and s elect Organiser and Not es . The phone will a sk you to set the date and t ime, if they have not already been s et when you star t to wr ite a note. To add a note, pres s Add not e or press Options and select Make a note . Key in t he note and select Save . Or scr oll to a note press View or press Options to see the opt ions for note s. Synchronis ation Synchronisation allow s you to s ave your calenda r and contact s data on a remote Internet se rver (network s ervice) or on a c ompatible PC. If y ou have saved dat a on the remote Internet server, you can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can als o synchronise the data in your phoneâÂÂs conta cts, calendar and notes to c orrespond to the dat a of your compatible PC by starting the sy nchronisation from your PC. Note : The cont act data i n your SIM card will not be sy nchronised. Answering an incoming call during sy nchronisation will end the synchronisation and you will need to re-start it .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 132 Synchro nis ing fr om your phone Before synchronising from your phone, you need to subscribe to a sy nchronisation service and get the configuration settings fr om your provider. For more information on av ailability a nd the synchronisation s ervice sett ings, contact your network operator or service provider. To start the synchronisation fr om your phone: 1. Activa te the connection s ettings you need for the s ynchronisation. See Settings for the sy nchronisation from your phone on page 132 . 2. Press Menu , select O rganiser , Synchronisation , Server sync and Data to be synchronised . Mark the data to be synchronis ed and press Done . 3. Press Menu , and select Organiser , Synchronisation , Ser ver sync and Synchronise . 4. The marke d data of th e active set will be synchr onised after confirmation. Note that synchronising for the f irst time or a fter an interrupted synchronisation may take up to 30 minutes t o complete, if the c ontacts or calendar ar e full. Se ttin gs fo r the syn chr oni sati o n from you r pho ne You may receiv e the synchronisation sett ings as a configuration message f rom the network operator or service provider . For more informatio n on availability and the synchronisation service settings , contact y our network operator or service provider. For receiving t he settings as a configuration me ssage, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 17 . To key in the s ettings manually , see Configuration settings on page 11 3 .
Menu func t ions 133 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Press Menu , sele ct Organiser , Synchronisation and Server sync and Sync s ettings . Select 1. Configuration and scroll to t he service provider whose s ettings you would like to act ivate a nd p ress Select . 2. Account to see the a ccounts provide d by the ser vice provider. If mor e than one account is displayed c hoose the one y ou want to us e. Synchro nis ing fr om your compati ble PC To synchronise contacts, the calendar and the notes from your PC, us e either an IR connection or a data cable . You also nee d the PC Suite s oftware of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation fr om your PC using PC su ite. Nokia PC Suite id available on NokiaâÂÂs Web site at www.nokia.com. Ensure that the phone is in standby mode a nd that the time and date are set. â App licat ions Gam es and ap pl i cat io ns Your phone softwa re may include some games and applications specially de signed for th is Nokia phone. Launchi ng a ga me or a n appli catio n Press Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection . Scroll to a game or an application and press Open .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 134 Note th at running some games or applications may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery faster (and you may need t o connect the phone t o the charge r). Options avail able f or a g ame or an appli cati on Press Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection . Scroll to a game or an application and press Options . The following options may be available: ⢠Delete to delete the game or application from the phone. Note t hat if you de lete a pre-installed game or applic ation from your phone, you may download it again to your phone from the support ar ea on the Nok ia website www.nok ia.com. ⢠Details to give additional information about t he game or application. ⢠Update ve rsion to check if a new version is a vailable for download f rom the servic es (netw ork serv ice). ⢠Web page to provide further information or additional data from an Int ernet page. T his feature nee ds to be supported by the network. It is only show n if an Internet addr ess has bee n provided with the game or application. ⢠App. access to restric t the game or a pplication fr om accessing th e network to prevent you from ac cruing unexpected cos ts. Select Communication and Networ k access , Messaging or Connectivity , or select Phone access or Auto- star t . Select in each c ategory, if av ailable, one of t he following per missions: ⢠Ask ever y time and the phone as ks alway s for net ac cess. ⢠Ask first t ime only and the phone asks on first attempt at net ac cess. ⢠Always allowed to allow net access.
Menu func t ions 135 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Not allowed to dis allow net access. Do wn loa din g a game o r an ap plic atio n Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applic ations. Make su re that the application is compatible wit h your phone bef ore downloading it. Important: Only install appl icatio ns from source s that offer a dequate pro tectio n against harmful software. You can dow nload new Ja va applications in different ways: â¢P r e s s Men u , and select Applications , Games and Game downloads , or Collection and App. downloads and the lis t of available bookmarks is s hown. Select More bookmarks to access t he list of bookmarks in the Services menu, see B ookmarks on page 150 . Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired page. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page f rom the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, ent er the Service s menu and ac tivate another se t of service s ettings, see Making a connection to a se r vic e on page 146 . Try again to connect t o the page. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. â¢P r e s s Men u , and se le c t Services and Download links . See Downloading on page 151 . ⢠Use t he Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications in your phone.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 136 Note that Nokia does not warrant for applications from non-Nokia sites. If you choose to download Java a pplicatio ns from th em, you should take the same precaut ions, for security or conte nt, as you would with any site. Note t hat when downloading an application, it ma y be saved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. Game sett ings Press Me nu , and select Applic ations , Games and App. settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for games. Memory status for games and a pplic ati ons To vie w the amount of me mory available f or game and applic ation installations (third s hared memory), p ress Menu , and select Applications , Games or Collection and th en Memory . The game s and applications use shared memory, see Shared memor y on page 14 . Calculato r The c alculator in your phone adds, s ubtracts, multiplies, divides, calculat es the squar e and t he square root and converts cur rency values. Note : This calc ulator has l imited accu racy and is desig ned for simple calculation s. 1.Press Me nu , and select Applications , Extras and Calculator . 2. When âÂÂ0â is displayed on the scre en, key in the first number in the calculat ion, press for a decimal point.
Menu func t ions 137 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 3. Press Options and select Ad d , Subt ract , Multiply , Divide , Squar e , Square root or Change sign . Tip: Alternatively, press once to add, twice to subtract, three times to multiply or f our times to divide. 4. Key in the s econd number. 5. To get the an swer, press Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is neces sary. 6. To s tart a new ca lculation, fir st press and hold Clear . Performing a currency conversion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Calculator . 2. To save the exchange rate, press Opt ions and select Exchange rat e . Select either of the display ed options. Key in the exc hange rate, pres s for a decimal poi nt, and press OK . The excha nge rate remains in t he memory until you replace it with anot her one. 3. To per form the cur rency conver sion, key in the amount to be c onverted, press Options and select In domestic or In foreign . Note : When you change base cu rrency, you must key in the new rates because all previousl y set exchange rate s are set to zero. Tip: You can als o perform t he currency conversion in s tandby mode. Key in the amount t o be convert ed, press Options and select In domestic or In foreign .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 138 Countd ow n t ime r Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Countdown t imer . Key in the alarm time in hours, minutes and seconds and pres s OK . If you wish, write your own note t ext which is displayed when the time expi res, and press Start to star t the countdown timer. ⢠To change the countdown time, select Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm time is reached when the phone is in standby mode, the phone sounds a to ne and flashes the note text if it is set or else Countdo wn time up . Stop t he alarm by pressing any k ey. If no key is pressed, the alarm automatically s tops within 30 seconds. To stop the alarm a nd to delete th e note text, press Exit . Stopw at ch You can me asure time, take intermediate t imes or lap times using the s topwatch. During timi ng, the other functions of the phone can be use d. To set the stopwatch timing i n the background, pr ess . Using the stop watch or allowi ng it to run in the b ackground when using ot her features incr ease s the dema nd on b att ery po wer an d re duces the batte ry li fe. Time observation and time splitting 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras , Stopwat ch and Split timing . You can select Continue if y ou have set the t iming in the background.
Menu func t ions 139 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 2. Press St art to star t the time obs ervation. Press Split every t ime you want t o take an intermediate time. The intermediate times are lis ted below t he running time on the display. Scroll to view the times. 3. Press St op to stop t he time obser vation. 4. To save the times, press Save and enter a name . Or press Options and select Start t o start the t ime observat ion again. The ne w time is added to t he previous t ime. Select Reset to res et the time without saving it. Lap times Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras , Stopwatch and Lap t iming . Press Start to s tart the time obs ervation and Lap to t ake a lap time. Press Stop to s top the lap timing. To sa ve the times , press Sa v e and enter a name. Or press Options and you can start or reset the lap t imes. Refer to Time observ ation and time splitting on page 138 . Viewing and deleting times Press Menu , and select Applications , Extras and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch is not reset, you c an select Show las t to view th e mo st rec ent measured t ime. Select Vie w times and a list of names or final t imes of the t ime sets is shown, selec t the time se t that y ou want to vie w. To dele te the sav ed times, s elect Delete times . Select Delete all and press OK , or sel ect One by one , scroll t o the times you want t o delete, press Delet e and press OK .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 140 Wal l et In Wallet you ca n save personal inf ormation, for example, credit card numbers and addr esses. The dat a that ar e saved in the wallet can easily be retrieved while browsing t o automatically fill in data fields, for example, when making pur chases and t he service suppor ts wallet functionality. You ca n also save ac cess codes to mobile s ervices that request a user name and password. The data i n the walle t are pr otected with a w allet code that you ca n define whe n yo u acc ess wal let fo r th e fir st ti me. At Create wallet code: key in the code and press OK to confirm it and at Verify wallet code: key in the code again and press OK . See also Wallet code (4 t o 1 0 digits) on page 16 . If you want to de lete all the c ontent of the wallet and the wallet c ode, key in *#7370925538# (*#res wallet# in lett ers) in standby mode. You als o need the phoneâÂÂs security code, see A cces s codes on page 15 . To add the content into the wallet menu, and to edit it, access the wallet menu. To use the content of the wallet in a mobile service, access the wallet via t he browser, s ee Ser v ic e s on page 144 . Access ing t he wa llet me nu To ac cess the w allet menu, press Menu , sele c t Applications , Extras and Wallet . Key in your wallet c ode and press OK , see W allet settings on page 143 . Selec t ⢠Wallet profiles to create car d combinations, for example, for different servic es. A wallet profile is helpful if the service asks for many data items to be filled in. You can s elect the appropriate wallet pr ofile instead of selecting differ ent cards se para tel y.
Menu func t ions 141 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Cards to save pers onal card informat ion. You can save payment c ard, loyalty card and access card information, for example username and password combinations for different servic es, and also addres ses and user da ta. See Saving c ard details on page 141 . ⢠Ti ckets to save the notifications of e- tickets that you have bought via a mobile ser v ic e. T o vi e w t he ti c k et s , pr es s Options and select View . ⢠Receipts to save receipts of mobile purchases. ⢠Personal notes t o save all kinds of personal inf ormation that you want to keep protected by the wa llet PIN code. S ee P ersonal notes on page 14 1 . ⢠Settings , s ee Wallet settings on page 143 . Saving c ard detail s Access t he wallet and s elect Cards . Select the card type to save details: Pay m e n t car ds , Loyalt y cards , Acc ess ca rd s , User info c ards , o r Address cards . If no c ard is added, pres s Add new , ot herwise, press Options an d s e le c t Add new . Fill in th e fields fo r the details and press Don e . If supported by your servic e provider, you c an also receiv e card information t o your phone as a configur ation message. You will be notified as t o which category the card belongs to. For availability of receiving car d information as configuration settings, c ontact the card issuer or service pr ovider. Persona l notes You can s ave personal notes, for ex ample, account number s, passwords, codes or notati ons .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 142 Access t he wallet and s elect Personal notes . P re s s Options and you can view, add, edit a s elected note and sort notes either by na me or date or delete notes. When viewing a note, yo u can edit or delete the selected note. The option Send via text msg. is for copy ing the note as a text message and Copy t o calendar is for copying the note to the calendar as a memo. U se detail is for extract ing numbers, e-ma il addresses a nd web addr esses from a not e. Creati ng a wall et prof ile When you have saved y our personal card details , you can c ombine them toget her into a wallet profile. You can use the profile to retrieve wallet data from different cards w hile browsing. 1. Access t he wallet and s elect Wallet profiles . 2. To creat e a new wallet profile if no profile is added, press Add new . Otherwis e, press Option s and sele ct Add new . 3. Fill in the f ollowing fields and press Done . Some of the fields cont ain data that are sel ected from t he wallet. You need to sav e those data before you can create a w allet profile. ⢠Select payment card nex t - select a car d from the pay ment card list. ⢠Select loyalty card ne xt - selec t a card fr om the loy alty card list. ⢠Select access card next - select a car d from the access card list . ⢠Select user info card next - selec t a card fr om the user data card list . ⢠Select billing address next - select an address from the addres s card list. ⢠Select s hipping address next - select an addres s from the ad dress card lis t.
Menu func t ions 143 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Select receipt deliv ery address next - se lect an address from the address card list. ⢠Select receipt deliv ery method next - select how the receipt is to be delivered, To phone number or T o e-mail address . ⢠Wallet profile name: enter a name for the pr ofile. Some of t he fields cont ain data that ar e selected from the wallet. You need to save those data before you can cr eate a walle t profile. Wa ll et s etti n gs Access t he wallet and s elect Se ttings . Select Change code to cha nge the wal let code. Se lect RFID to se t the RF ID ID with the RFID code and RF ID type . (RF ID = Radio Frequency Identificat ion, techn ology to securely conduct commercial transactions us ing your phone). Guidel ine s for pa yi ng for yo ur pur ch ases wit h th e wal let ⢠To do your shopping, acc ess the des ired service site that supports the wallet. The s ervice needs t o support the Elec tronic Commerce Modelling Language specifica tion. See Making a connection to a service on page 146 . Choose the pr oduct that you want t o buy and carefu lly read all information provid ed before your purc hase. The text may not fit within a s ingle screen. Therefore, mak e sure to scroll through and read all of the te xt before your purchase. ⢠To pay for the items that you wish to b uy, the phone ask s whether you want to use w allet or not. T he phone also a sks for your wa llet PIN code.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 144 ⢠Se lec t the c ard th at you w ant to p ay wi th from th e Pay ment cards list. Provi ded that the dat a form you receive from the servic e provider suppor ts the Elect ronic Commerce Modelling Language specification, th e phone automatically fills in t he credit c ard information or the wallet pr ofile from the wallet. ⢠Approve the purchase, and the informat ion is forwarded. ⢠You may receive an acknowledgement or a digital receipt of t he purchase. ⢠To clos e the wallet, select Close wallet . If you do not us e the wallet for 5 minutes, it will be a utomatically clos ed. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data tempor arily. If you have tr ied to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passw ords, empty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have acce ssed is stor ed in the cache. To empty the cache , see The cache memory on page 153 . â Ser vi ce s You can access various mobile Internet services with your phoneâÂÂs browser. These se rvices may include for ex ample, weather reports, news or f light times and financial information. Check th e availability of these s ervices, prici ng and tarif fs with yo ur network opera tor and/or the ser vice provider whos e service you wish to us e. Serv ice providers wi ll also give you instruct ions on how to use their services.
Menu func t ions 145 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. With your phoneâÂÂs browser you can v iew the servic es that use W ireless Mark-Up Language (WML) or extensible HyperText Mark-up L anguage (xHTML) on their pages. Appearance may va ry due to s creen size . Note that y ou may not be able t o view a ll the details of the Int ernet pages. Basic st eps for acc ess ing a nd u sing se rvi ces 1. Save t he service settings that ar e required to access t he service that you want to use. See page 145 . 2. Make a connection to t he given s ervice. See p age 146 . 3. Start browsing the pages of the s ervice. See page 147 . 4. Once you are finished browsing, end the connection to t he service. See page 148 . Sett ing up th e p hon e for a ser vi ce Your p hone may have stored some service s ettings. Additional s ettings may be received as a configuration mess age from the network operat or or service provide r that offe rs th e serv ice tha t you wan t to use. To recei ve the s ervice settings as a configur ation message, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 17 and Configuration s ettings on page 11 3 . For mor e information and f or the appropriate settings, contact the network opera tor or service provider that offers the s ervice that y ou want to use.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 146 Ma ki ng a co nne ctio n to a s ervi ce 1. Make s ure that the service settings of the service y ou want to us e are activa ted. To ac tiva te the settin gs : Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Settings and Configuration settings . Select Configuration and select th e configuration set you want to activate. 2. Mak e a connection t o the ser vice. There are t hree ways to c onnect: ⢠Open the start page, for example, the homepage of t he service provider: Press Menu , and select Serv ices and Home , or in standby mode pres s and hold . ⢠Se lect a bookmar k of the service: Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Bookmarks , and select a bookmark. If the bookmark does not work with t he current act ive servi ce settings, activat e another set of service settings and try aga in. ⢠Select the last URL: Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Last web addr . . ⢠Ke y in the addre ss of the s ervice: Press Menu , and select Serv ices and then Go to address . Key in the addre ss of the service and press OK .
Menu func t ions 147 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Br owsin g the pag es of a service After you have made a connection to the service, you can start browsing its pages. The funct ion of the phone keys ma y vary in diff erent services. Follow the text guides o n the phone display. For more information, c ontact your serv ice provider. Note that if GPRS is s elected as the data bearer, the indicator is shown on the top l eft of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a text mess age, or make a call during an (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top l eft of the display to indicate that the (E)GPRS connec tion is suspended (on hold). After a call, f or example, the phone tries t o reconnect the (E)GPRS connection. Using th e phon e keys whi le bro wsi ng ⢠Us e the joystick to browse t hrough the page . ⢠To s elect a highlighte d item, pres s , or pres s Options to select t he option for opening th e link. ⢠To ente r letters and numbers, press the keys - and to enter special char acters, press the key . Options while br owsing Press Option s and the following options may be ava ilable. The ser vice provider may als o offer other options. Select ⢠Shortcuts to open a ne w list of options that ar e, for ex ample, specific to the page. ⢠Home to open t he home page of the selec ted service provider .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 148 ⢠Add bookmark to save the page as a bookmark. ⢠Bookmarks . See Bookmarks on page 150 . ⢠Histo ry to get a lis t showing last vi sited URLs. ⢠Download links to show t he list of bookmarks for downloading. ⢠Save t o folder to save the c urrent page to a download folder . ⢠Other options to show a list of ot her options, f or example options f or some security opt ions. ⢠Reload to reload and update the curr ent page. ⢠Quit . See Disconnect from a service on page 148 . A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data tempor arily. If you have tr ied to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passw ords, empty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have acce ssed is stor ed in the cache. To empty the cache, see The cache memory on pa g e 153 . Direct call ing The browse r supports functions that y ou can access while b rowsing. You can make a voic e call, s end DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and s ave a name and a phone numbe r from a page. Di sco n ne ct f ro m a se rvi ce To quit br owsing and to e nd the connection, press Options and select Qui t . W h en Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press twice, or press and hold
Menu func t ions 149 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Appe ar an ce set ti ngs of th e brow ser While brows ing, press Options and select Other options and Appear . se ttings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Se rvices , Se ttings and Appearance settings . Select ⢠Text wrapping . Select On and the text continues on the next line. If you select Off , the text will be abbreviate d. ⢠Font si ze and choose a size. ⢠Show images . Select No and any pictures a ppearing on the page are not shown. This can speed up the browsing of pages that contain a lot of pictures. ⢠Alerts and select Alert for unsecure connection and Yes to set the ph one to aler t when a sec ure connection c hanges to an insecure one dur ing browsing. Select Alert for uns ecure items and Yes to set t he pho ne to alert when a secu re page cont ains an insecure item. Note that these alert s do not guarantee a secure connection. For more information, see Brow se r sec urity on page 153 . ⢠Character encoding to select th e character set that the phone uses for showing browser pages that do not include that information or to s elect whether to always use UTF- 8 encoding when s ending a Web addr ess to a compatible phone. Cooki es A cookie is data t hat a site saves in your phoneâÂÂs browser cache memory. The data can be, for example, your user informa tion or your browsing preferences. Cookies
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 150 will be saved until you clear the c ache memory, s ee The ca che memory on page 153 . 1. While browsing, press O ptions and select Other options , Securit y and Cookie settings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and s elect Services , Settin gs , Securit y setti ngs and Cookies . 2. Select Allow or Rej ec t t o allow the phone t o or prevent the phone from receiving c ookies. Bookma rks You can save page addresses as bookmarks in the phoneâÂÂs memory. 1. While browsing, press O ptions and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Services and Bookmarks . 2. Scroll t o the bookmark that you want to us e and press Select t o m a k e a connect ion to the page associated with the bookmar k. Or sele ct Options to view t he title and t he address of the select ed bookmark, edit or delete the selected bookmark, or s end it directly to another phone as a bookmar k, or as a text mes sage, or cr eate a new b ookmark. Your device may have some bookma rks load ed for site s not affili ate d to Nokia. Nokia d oes not warrant or endors e these sit es. If you ch oose to acces s them, you should take the sa me precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site.
Menu func t ions 151 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Receiv in g a boo kmark When you have receiv ed a bookmar k (sent as a book mark) 1 bookmark received is displaye d. Press Show to view the bookmark To save the bookmark, press Save , or press Option s and sele ct View to see the details or De lete to discar d it. To disc ard the bookmark directly after you hav e received t he bookmark, pres s Ex it and OK . Dow nl o ad in g To downloa d more tones, gr aphics, games, v ideos, themes or applications to your phone (networ k service), pre ss Menu , and s elect Services and Download links . Select Tone downloads , Graphic downloads , Game down loads , V ideo downloads , Theme downloads or App. downloads . Imp ortan t: Only ins tall ap plicatio ns from source s that offer adequate protect ion against harmful software. For the availability of different services, pricing and t ariffs, contact your network operator and/or service prov ider. Servi ce inbo x The phone is able to r eceive ser vice messages (pushe d messages) s ent by your service provider (networ k service). Service mes sages are notificat ions of, f or example, news headlines, and they may contain a text message or a n address of a servi ce. To a cce s s the Service inbox in s tandby mode, when y ou have r eceived a ser vice message, pr ess Show .
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 152 If you press Exit the me ssage is moved to the Service inbox . To ac cess th e Service inbox later, pres s Menu , and s elect Services and Service inbox . To a cce s s the Service inbox while browsing, press O ptions and select Othe r options and Se rvice inbox . Scr oll to the message that you want, pr ess Re trieve to activat e the brows er and download t he marked cont ent, or press Options and sel ect Details to display det ailed information on the servic e notification, or select Delete to delete it. Se rvic e in bo x se ttin gs Press Menu , and select Serv ices , Settings and Ser vice inbox settings . â¢S e l e c t Service mes sages and On (or Off ) to set the phone to re cei ve (or not to receive) service messages. â¢S e l e c t Message filter and On to set th e phone to receive service mes sages only from c ontent authors approv ed by the se rvice provider. To view the list of th e approved cont ent authors, select T rusted channels . â¢S e l e c t Automatic connection . If y ou have se t the phone t o receive s ervice messages and select On , the phone will automatical ly activ ate the browser from sta ndby mode when t he phone has received a s ervice mes sage. If you select Off , the phone will act ivate the browser only afte r you have sel ect e d Retrieve when the phone has received a service mes sage.
Menu func t ions 153 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. The cache memory The informa tion or services that you hav e access ed are stored in the cache of your phone. A c ache is a buffer me mory, which is used to stor e data temporarily. To emp t y th e c a che : ⢠while br owsing, pres s Options and select Other options and Clear the cache , or ⢠in standby mode, press Menu , and select Services , and Clear the cac he . Br owse r se curi ty Security features may be required for s ome service s, such as banking services or online shoppi ng. For such c onnections you need security certificates and possibly a se curity module which may be available on your SIM c ard. For more information, contact your service provider. Securi ty modul e The se curity module can contain c ertificates as w ell as private and public k eys. The purpose of t he securit y module is to improve securit y services for applications requiring brows er connection, and it allows you to use a digital signature. The certificat es are s aved in the s ecurity module by the s ervice provider . Press Menu and select Services , Settings , Sec urity settings and Security module settings . Select ⢠Secur ity module details to show the s ecurity module title, its status, manufacturer and serial number.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 154 ⢠Module PIN request to set the phone to request t he module PIN when using service s provided by security module. Key in the c ode and select On . To disable the module PIN request, select Off . ⢠Change module PIN to change t he module PIN, if allowed by t he security module. Enter the current module PIN code, t hen enter the new c ode twice. ⢠Change signing PIN . Select the signing PIN that you want to change . Enter t he current PIN code, t hen enter the new code twice. See als o Access codes on page 15 . Ce rtif ica tes There are three kinds of certificates: server certificat es, authority certificates and user ce rtificates. ⢠The phone uses a server certificate to create a connection with improved securit y to the c ontent server . The phone receives t he server c ertificate from the service provider be fore the connection is es tablished and its validity is checke d using the author ity certificates s aved in the phone. Server certif icates ar e n ot s a ve d. The s ecurity indicator is displayed during a connection if the data transmission between the phone and the content server is encrypted. The s ecurity icon does not indicate t hat the dat a transmission between the gateway and the cont ent server (or place where t he request ed resource is stored) is secure. The service provider s ecures the dat a transmission between the gat eway and th e con tent s erver.
Menu func t ions 155 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Author ity certificate s are used by some service s, such as banking services , for checking the validity of other certificates. Authority certific ates can either be saved in the secur ity module by t he service provider, or they can be downloaded fr om the network, if the s ervice supports t he use of aut hority certificat es. ⢠Us er certificates a re issued t o users by a Cer tifying Authority. User ce rtificates are r equired, for exampl e, to cr eate a digit al signature and t hey ass ociate the user wit h a spec ific private k ey in a s ecurity module. Imp ortan t: Note tha t even if the u se of certi fica tes makes th e risks invo lved in remote con nections a nd software installa tion consi derably sm aller, th ey must be used correctly in order to bene fit from increased security. The existence of a certif icate d oes not offer any prot ection by it self; th e cer tificate ma nager must contain correct, authe ntic, or trus ted certifi cates for increased sec urity to be available. Certificates have a res tricte d lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is s hown even if the certifi cate should be valid, check that the current date and tim e in your device are corre ct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner o f the cer tif icate an d that th e certi ficat e real ly belon gs to the li sted owne r. Digital s ignat ure You can ma ke digital signatures with your phone if your SIM card has a security module. The signature can be traced back to you via the private key on the sec urity module and t he user cer tificate t hat was used to perform the s ignature. Using the digital signature can be the same as signing your name to a paper bill, contract or other doc ument.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 156 To mak e a digital signat ure, selec t a link on a pa ge, for exa mple, the t itle of the book that you want to buy and it s price. The text to s ign (possibly including amount, date, etc.) will be shown. Check tha t the he ader text is Re ad and that the digital s ignature icon is show n. Note : If the digit al signature icon doe s not a ppear, there is a security breach, and you should not e nter any pers onal data such as your signing PIN. To s ign the text, r ead all of t he text fi rst and then you can s elect Sign . The text may not f it within a s ingle screen. Therefore, mak e sure to scroll through and read all of th e text before s igning. Select t he user cer tificate you want to use. Key in t he signing PIN (see Ge ne ra l information on page 12 ) and press OK . The digital signature icon will disappear, and t he service ma y display a confirmation of your purchase. â SIM s ervic es In addit ion to the functions a vailable on the phone, your SIM card may provide addit ional services that you can acces s in this menu which is shown only if it is s upported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend on t he SIM car d. For availa bility, rates and inf ormation on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor, e.g. network operator, service provider or other vendor.
Menu func t ions 157 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. Depending on the operator you can set the phone to show you the c onfirmation messages sent between your phone and the net work when y ou are using t he SIM service s by selecting t he option Ye s wi thin the m enu Confir m SIM service actions , in Phone s ettings . Note that accessing these services may involve sending messages or making a phone call for which y ou may be cha rged.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 158 7. PC Connect ivit y You can s end and receiv e e-mails, and access the Int ernet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR c onnection or via a data cable connection. You can us e your phone wit h a vari ety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you c an, for example, s ynchronise contacts, c alendar and to- do notes and notes between your phone and the compatible PC or a remote Inte rnet server (networ k service). You may find more information a nd downloadable f iles, for example PC suite, in the support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia.com. â PC Su ite PC Suite contains the f ollowing applications (in alphabetical order): ⢠HTML H el p to support t he application usage. ⢠Nokia 7260 data modem drivers enable y ou to use your phone as a modem. ⢠Nokia Application Installer t o install J2ME Java applications from a compatible PC t o the phone , for example games and dictiona ries. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select the connection type between the PC and phone. ⢠Nokia Contact s Editor to edit contacts in your phone.
PC Con nec tivit y 159 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to back-up and restore pe rsonal data between your phone and a compatible PC. Supports also content transfer t o another compatible N okia phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to make images in su pported formats usabl e for multimedia messages or wall paper and to t ransfer them to y our phone. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for HSCSD and GPRS connec tions. ⢠Nokia Multimedia Player to for playing sounds, images , videos and multimedia messages on the P C. Multimedia Playe r allows you t o view multimedia received on y our phone or vi a e-mail. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calendar and to- do notes between your phone and a compatible PC. ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to view the contents of t he Gallery f older of your phone on a c ompatible PC. You can br owse picture a nd audio files and also modify files in the phoneâÂÂs memory and transfer files between your phone and PC. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages and edit t he contacts in your phone. ⢠Nokia Settings Manager to edit and send your br owser bookmarks or update the connect ion sets to your phone. You can also search for r adio channels, and delete, edit or modify t he current radio channe ls on your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to optimise poly phonic ringing tones in s upported formats to be compatible with your phone and to tra nsfer them to your phone. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ring ing t ones , and o ther conten t from bei ng c o pi ed , mo di fie d, tr ans f err ed or f o rwa rd ed.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 160 (E)G P RS, H SC SD a nd C SD With your phone you c an use the (E)GPRS (Enhanced GPRS), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Cir cuit Switched D ata, GSM data ) data s ervices. For availa bility and subsc ription to data services, cont act your network operator or service provider. Note t hat the use of HSCSD ser vices consumes the phoneâÂÂs bat tery faster t han normal voice or dat a calls. You may need to c onnect the phone t o a charger for the duration of the dat a transfer. See (E)G PRS modem settings on pa ge 11 2 . â Us ing data comm unica tion applica tion s For information on using a data commu nication application, refer to the document ation provided with it. Note th at making or answering phone calls during a computer connec tion is not recommended as it might disr upt the operation. For bet ter performance during dat a calls, place the phone on a stationar y surface with the keypad f acing downward. D o not move t he phone by holding it in your hand during a da ta call.
Ba tter y info rmat ion 161 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. 8. Batte ry i nfo rma ti on â Charg ing and Di schar gi ng Your de vice is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only afte r two or three complet e charge and disc harge cycles. Th e battery can be ch arged and d isc harge d hundr eds of tim es but it will eventua lly wear out. W hen the talk an d standby times are noticeably sho rter than normal, b uy a new battery. Use o nly Nokia appr ov ed ba tter i es , a nd r ech a rge yo ur bat ter y o nl y wi th Nok ia ap pro ved ch ar ger s designated for this device. Unplug th e char ger from the ele ctrical plug a nd th e devi ce when not in use. Do no t leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging m ay shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged batt ery will lo se its charge o ver time . Temperatu re extr emes can affect the abilit y of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is dama ged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Accid ental short -circuiti ng can occur when a meta llic object such as a coin, clip , or pen cau ses direct co nnection of t he positive ( ) an d negative (- ) terminals of the b attery. (Thes e look like meta l strips on th e battery. ) This might happ en, for example, when you carr y a spare battery in yo ur pocket o r purse. Short-cir cuiti ng the terminals ma y damage the batt ery or the con necting object . Leaving the batte ry in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in s ummer or winter conditions, w ill reduce the capacit y and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF) . A device with a hot or col d battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temper atures we ll belo w freezin g.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 162 Do not dis pose of b atte ries in a fire ! Di spose of ba tteri es a ccordi ng to loca l reg ulati ons. Please recycl e when pos sible. Do not dispo se as househ old waste.
CARE AND M AINTENANCE 163 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. CARE AN D MAIN TENA NCE You r de v ice is a pr od uc t of s up eri or d es ign and cr afts m ans h ip and s ho ul d be tre a te d w ith care. The suggestions bel ow will help you prot ect your warranty coverage. ⢠K eep th e devic e dry. Prec ipitat ion, humi dity a nd al l types of liqu ids o r moi sture ca n contain mineral s that will co rrode electron ic circuits. If yo ur device does get wet, remo ve the battery a nd allo w the device to dr y completely b efore rep lacin g it. ⢠D o not us e or stor e the device in d usty, d irty a reas . Its movi ng part s an d el ectron ic co mpon ents can be d ama ged. ⢠Do not st ore the devic e in h ot a reas. High tempera tures can shorten the life of elect ronic de vices, dama ge b atterie s, and war p or m elt ce rtain plas tics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device ret urns to its normal tem perature, mo isture can form i nsid e the d evice and d ama ge el ectron ic cir cuit bo ards . ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough han dling can break in ternal circuit b oards and fi ne mec han ics . ⢠Do not us e harsh che micals, cleani ng solven ts, or stron g dete rgents to clean t he devi ce. ⢠D o not pa int the de vice. Paint c an cl og t he mov ing par ts an d p revent pr ope r ope ration. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lenses (such as camera, pro ximity sen sor, and light s ensor l enses). ⢠U se o nly th e sup plied or an a ppro ved re place men t an tenna. U nau thorise d ant ennas, mo dificat ions, or att achme nts co uld dam age t he dev ice and may v iola te reg ulatio ns gov ernin g radio devices.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 164 All of the abov e suggesti ons apply equal ly to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any d evice is not workin g properly, t ake i t to the neares t authorize d service facility for service.
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 165 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. ADDI TION AL S AFE TY IN F ORMA T ION â Tra ffi c Sa fe ty Do not us e a h and-he ld te lephone while drivi ng a v ehic le. Alwa ys secur e the phone in its holder; do not place the pho ne on the pa sseng er seat o r where it can brea k loose in a co llision or s udden stop . Remember road safety always comes firs t! â Operat ing envir onment Remember to f ollow any spe cial regula tions in f orce in an y area and alw ays switch of f your device whe n its us e is proh ibited or when it may cause interfer ence or danger . Use the d evic e only in its norma l opera ting posi tions. T o mainta in complia nce with radio fre quency exposur e guidel ines only u se enha ncements approv ed by Nokia for use with th is de vice. Wh en the device is on a nd being w orn on the b ody, alwa ys use an a pprov ed hold er or carrying case. Parts of the device a re magnetic. Metalli c materi als may be attract ed to the device , and pers o ns wi t h a he ar in g a id s hou ld not ho ld the dev ic e to the ea r wit h t he h ear ing aid. Al way s secure the devi ce in its hold er, b ecause meta llic mate rials may be attract ed by the ea rpiece. Do n ot p la ce cr edit ca rd s o r o th er mag net ic s tor ag e me d ia n ea r th e dev ice , b ec au se informatio n stored on them ma y be erased. â Medical dev ices Ope ration of a ny ra dio tra nsmit ting e quipme nt, inc lud ing wire less p hon es, may interf ere with the functi onality o f ina dequately p rotected medical d evices. Co nsult a physician or t he manufacturer of the med ical de vice to deter mine if they are adeq uately shi elded from
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 166 external RF energ y or if you have any q uestions. Switch off your device in health care facilitie s when an y regulatio ns pos ted in th ese area s instr uct you to do so. Hospi tals o r health care f aciliti es may be usin g equipment th at could be sensitive to extern al RF ener gy. Pacemaker s Pacemaker manu facture rs recommen d that a mi nimum separa tion of 6 in . (15.3 cm) be mai ntaine d be tween a wi reless phone an d a pac emake r to a void p ote ntial in terfe rence with the pacemaker. These recommenda tions are consistent wit h the independ ent research b y and recommendat ions of Wire less Tec hnolo gy Research . Persons wi th pacemake rs should : ⢠always keep the de vice more than 6 in. (15. 3 cm) from their pacema ker when the device is switched on; ⢠n ot ca rry the de vice i n a br east poc ket; and ⢠h old the dev ice t o the ear oppos ite t he pac emak er to m ini mise the pot ent ial for interference. If you have any reason to sus pect that inte rference is tak ing place, sw itch off your device immediately. Hearing a ids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with so me hearing aids. If interference occurs, consu lt your servi ce provide r. â Potent iall y ex plosi ve envi ro nment s Switch off your device when in any area with a pot entially ex plos ive atmosp here and obey all signs and instr uctions. Potenti ally exp losiv e atmosphere s includ e areas where you woul d normally be advised to turn off your vehicle eng ine. Sparks in s uch areas could cause an explosion or fire res ulting in bodily injury or even death. Sw itch off the device at refuelling poi nts such as near g as pum ps at serv ice sta tion s. Obse rve rest ric tion s on t he u se of radi o
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 167 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. eq uipmen t in fuel depots , sto rage, a nd distri bution are as, che mic al pla nts o r wh ere b lasting operatio ns are in pr ogress . Areas wit h a potenti all y explosive atmospher e are oft en but not always clea rly mark ed. They in clude b elow deck o n boats, chemical tr ansf er or sto rage fac ilities , vehi cles usi ng liqu efie d petro leum g as (s uch as prop ane or butane ), and area s where the air co ntains chemicals o r particle s such as g rain, dust or me tal powder s. â Vehicl es RF signals may affect impro perly inst alled or inadequ ately shie lded electronic s ystems i n motor vehicl es such as el ectronic f uel inje ction sys tems, elect ronic a ntisk id (antilo ck) br aking sys tems, ele ctr onic spe ed con trol syst em s, ai r bag s yst ems. Fo r more inf orma tio n, check with the ma nufactur er or its represent ative of your vehicle o r any e quipment tha t has be en adde d. Only qualif ied perso nnel shoul d service the device, o r install th e device in a vehicle . Faulty installatio n or servi ce may be da ngerous and ma y invalidate any warranty t hat may apply to the device. Ch eck regula rly that all w ireless device equip ment in your veh icle is mounted and opera tin g pr operly . Do n ot s tore or ca rry f lamm abl e liq uids , gase s, or expl osiv e mat eria ls in the same compar tment as th e device, it s parts, or enh anceme nts. For vehicle s equip ped with an air b ag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, incl udin g inst alle d or po rtab le w irel ess eq uipme nt in the area over t he a ir bag or in the air bag deploy ment area . If in- vehicl e wireles s equip ment is imp roperl y insta lled and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your de vice while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be da ngerous to the operatio n of the airc raft, d isrupt th e wirele ss tele phone network, and may be ille gal.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 168 â Emergen cy ca lls Important: Wir e les s p hon es , i nc lud in g th is de vi ce, o per ate us in g ra di o s ig nal s , wir el es s networks , landline n etworks, a nd user-p rogrammed functions . Because of this , connecti ons in all condition s cannot b e guarante ed. You s hould never rely sole ly on any wireles s device for essenti al communica tions lik e medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal streng th. Some network s may require that a valid SIM card is prop erly inser ted in the de vice. 2. Press as many tim es as need ed to clear the dis play and ready th e device for cal ls. 3. Key in the official emergency number for your pr esent lo cation. Emerge ncy numbers vary by lo ca t io n. 4. Press t he key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency cal l. If th e device is in of fline or fli ght mode you must change the pr ofile to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service pro vider for more information. When making an emergency call , give all the necessary i nformation as ac curately as possible. Y our wirel ess device ma y be the only mea ns of commun icatio n at the scen e of an acc ident. Do not end the call un til gi ven per missio n to do so. â Ce rtif icat ion inf orma tio n (S AR ) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTE RNATIONA L GUIDELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio trans mitte r and receiver. It is design ed and manufac tured no t to exceed the lim its for exposur e to radio freque ncy (RF) reco mmended by in ternat ional
ADDI TIONAL SAFE TY I NFORMATI ON 169 Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. A ll rights reserved. guideli nes (ICNI RP). Th ese limi ts are par t of compr ehensi ve guide lines and establ ish permitte d levels of RF energy f or the genera l popu lation. T he guidel ines were develop ed by inde pe nd en t sc ie nt ifi c org an is at io ns th rou gh per i odi c an d t hor ou gh eva lu ati on of sc ie nt if ic studies. The guidelin es in clude a subst antia l safety ma rgin desig ned to assur e the safe ty of all perso ns, regardless of age and health. The exposu re standard for mobile devices emplo ys a unit of measureme nt known as the Specifi c Absorpt ion Rate, or SAR. Th e SAR limi t stated in the inter natio nal gu idelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard op erating positi ons with the device tra nsmit ting a t its hi ghes t certi fied pow er level in all t ested freque ncy b ands. Althou gh the SA R is de termi ned at the high est cert ifi ed po wer leve l, t he actua l SA R of the device w hile operatin g can be well belo w the maxi mum value. T his is becau se the d evice is desi gned to operate at mult ip le power leve ls so as to use only th e power req uired to rea ch the ne twork. In general, the clo ser you ar e to a base stat ion, the low er the power outpu t of the devic e. The highes t SAR value fo r this device when tes ted fo r use at the e ar is 0.51 W/kg. This device meets RF exp osure gui del ines when used eit her in the normal use pos ition again st t he ear o r when pos iti oned at le as t 2.2 c m away fro m th e bod y. Whe n a c arry c ase, bel t c lip or h o ld er i s used fo r bo d y- wor n op er a tio n, it sh oul d n ot con ta in me tal an d sh ou ld pos ition the pr oduct at le ast 2.2 c m awa y fr om y our body . In order to transmit d ata files or me ssages, thi s device require s a quality connect ion to the network. In so me case s, transmis sion of data files o r messages may be delay ed until such a connection is ava ilable. Ensure the above se paration dis tance instr ucti ons are followed unt il the trans mission is co mplete d. * T he SAR limit for mobil e device s use d by the pu blic i s 2.0 w atts/ kilog ram (W /kg) av era ged over ten grams of bod y tissue . The guidel ines i ncorp orate a subst anti al marg in of safety to gi ve addit ional p rotec tion for the publ ic and to acco unt for any v ariations in m easur ements. SA R value s may vary dependin g on nationa l repor ting requi rements and t he net work band.
Copyri ght é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 170 For SAR informa tion in other regions please look under product information at www. no k ia. co m.